Standard Horizon Modem GM29 User Manual
GM29  
Integrator’s Manual  
Product Photo/Illustration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Part 1: Overview................................................................................................. 11  
1. Introduction............................................................................................................ 13  
1.1 Target Users  
1.2 Prerequisites  
......................................................................................... 13  
......................................................................................... 13  
1.3 Manual Structure ......................................................................................... 13  
2. GM29 Modem......................................................................................................... 14  
2.1 Description  
2.2 Highlights  
......................................................................................... 14  
......................................................................................... 14  
2.3 GM29 in a Communication System............................................................. 15  
2.4 Main Features and Services ......................................................................... 17  
2.4.1  
2.4.2  
2.4.3  
2.4.4  
2.4.5  
2.4.6  
2.4.7  
2.4.8  
Types of Mobile Station .................................................................. 17  
Short Message Service.................................................................... 17  
Voice Calls...................................................................................... 18  
Data................................................................................................. 18  
Fax .................................................................................................. 18  
Supplementary Services .................................................................. 18  
Serial Communication .................................................................... 19  
Interfacing with the GM29.............................................................. 19  
2.5 Service and Support ..................................................................................... 20  
2.6 Precautions ......................................................................................... 20  
3. Abbreviations ......................................................................................................... 21  
Part 2: Integrating the Modem............................................................................ 23  
1. Mechanical Description......................................................................................... 25  
1.1 Overview  
......................................................................................... 25  
1.2 Physical Dimensions.................................................................................... 27  
2. Electrical Description ............................................................................................ 28  
2.1 Power Connector ......................................................................................... 28  
2.2 Audio Connector ......................................................................................... 29  
2.3 Antenna Connector....................................................................................... 31  
2.4 SIM Card Reader ......................................................................................... 32  
2.5 RS232 Serial Port......................................................................................... 33  
2.5.1  
2.5.2  
2.5.3  
Serial Data...................................................................................... 34  
Serial Data Signals - RD, TD ......................................................... 34  
Control Signals - RTS, CTS, DTR, DSR, DCD, RI ......................... 34  
2.6 Real Time Clock ......................................................................................... 35  
2.7 Software Updates ......................................................................................... 35  
3. Operation................................................................................................................ 36  
3
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
3.1 Switching On the Modem............................................................................. 36  
3.2 Switching Off the Modem............................................................................ 36  
3.3 Resetting the Modem.................................................................................... 36  
3.4 Operating States/LED................................................................................... 37  
4. Hints for Integrating the Modem..........................................................................38  
4.1 Safety Advice and Precautions..................................................................... 38  
4.1.1  
4.1.2  
4.1.3  
General............................................................................................38  
SIM Card .........................................................................................38  
Antenna............................................................................................39  
4.2 Installation of the Modem............................................................................. 39  
4.2.1  
4.2.2  
4.3 Antenna  
4.3.1  
Where to Install the Modem ............................................................39  
How to Install the Modem ...............................................................40  
.......................................................................................... 41  
General............................................................................................41  
Antenna Type...................................................................................42  
Antenna Placement..........................................................................42  
The Antenna Cable ..........................................................................42  
Possible Communication Disturbances...........................................42  
4.3.2  
4.3.3  
4.3.4  
4.3.5  
4.4 Accessories  
.......................................................................................... 43  
5. Technical Data ........................................................................................................44  
6. Declaration of Conformity.....................................................................................49  
Part 3: Using AT Commands.............................................................................. 51  
1. Introduction to AT Commands.............................................................................53  
1.1 Overview  
.......................................................................................... 53  
1.2 Syntax Description ....................................................................................... 53  
1.2.1  
1.2.2  
1.2.3  
Conventions.....................................................................................53  
AT Command Syntax .......................................................................54  
AT Response Syntax.........................................................................55  
1.3 Error Codes  
.......................................................................................... 57  
1.3.1  
1.3.2  
+CME ERROR (Mobile Equipment Error Code) ...........................57  
+CMS ERROR (Message Service Failure Result Code).................58  
1.4  
Examples on How to Use the AT Commands............................................. 59  
2. Call Control.............................................................................................................61  
2.1 AT+CPIN  
2.2 ATA  
2.3 ATD  
2.4 ATH  
2.5 ATO  
2.6 ATP  
2.7 ATT  
2.8 ATX  
2.9 AT+CHUP  
PIN Control ...................................................................... 61  
Answer Incoming Call ..................................................... 61  
Dial................................................................................... 62  
Hang up ............................................................................ 64  
Return to Online Data Mode............................................ 64  
Select Pulse Dialling ........................................................ 64  
Select Tone Dialling......................................................... 64  
Call Progress Monitoring Control.................................... 65  
Hang up Call .................................................................... 65  
4
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.10 AT+CMOD  
2.11 AT+CVHU  
2.12 AT+VTS  
Call Mode ........................................................................ 66  
Voice Hang-Up................................................................ 67  
DTMF and Tone Generation ........................................... 67  
3. Control and Status ................................................................................................. 69  
3.1 ATQ  
3.2 ATS0  
3.3 ATS2  
3.4 ATS3  
3.5 ATS4  
3.6 ATS5  
3.7 ATS6  
3.8 ATS7  
Result Code Suppression ................................................. 69  
Automatic Answer Control.............................................. 69  
Escape Sequence Character ............................................. 70  
Command Line Termination Character........................... 70  
Response Formatting Character....................................... 71  
Command Line Editing Character (BACKSPACE)........ 72  
Blind Dial Delay Control................................................. 72  
Connection Completion Timeout .................................... 73  
Comma Dial Modifier Delay Control.............................. 73  
Automatic Disconnect Delay Control.............................. 74  
Ericsson Call Monitoring................................................. 74  
Ericsson Daylight Saving Time....................................... 75  
Ericsson Master Reset...................................................... 76  
Ericsson Pin Event........................................................... 76  
Set Clock and Date .......................................................... 77  
Extended Error Report..................................................... 77  
Set Phone Functionality................................................... 78  
Indicator Control.............................................................. 79  
List all available AT Commands ..................................... 80  
Mobile Equipment Error.................................................. 80  
Mobile Equipment Event Reporting................................ 81  
Phone Activity Status ...................................................... 82  
PIN Control...................................................................... 83  
Change Password............................................................. 85  
Service Reporting Control ............................................... 87  
Cellular Result Code........................................................ 87  
Save Settings.................................................................... 88  
Signal Strength................................................................. 89  
Automatic Time Zone Update ......................................... 90  
3.9 ATS8  
3.10 ATS10  
3.11 AT*ECAM  
3.12 AT*EDST  
3.13 AT*EMAR  
3.14 AT*EPEE  
3.15 TAT+CCLK  
3.16 AT+CEER  
3.17 AT+CFUN  
3.18 AT+CIND  
3.19 AT+CLAC  
3.20 AT+CMEE  
3.21 AT+CMER  
3.22 AT+CPAS  
3.23 AT+CPIN  
3.24 AT+CPWD  
3.25 AT+CR  
3.26 AT+CRC  
3.27 AT+CSAS  
3.28 AT+CSQ  
3.29 AT+CTZU  
4. Audio ....................................................................................................................... 91  
4.1 AT*E2EAMS Ericsson M2M Audio Profile Modification..................... 91  
4.2 AT*E2APR  
4.3 AT*EALR  
4.4 AT*EAMS  
4.5 AT*EARS  
4.6 AT*ELAM  
4.7 AT*EMIC  
4.8 AT*EMIR  
4.9 AT*EXVC  
M2M Audio Profile Manipulation................................... 97  
Ericsson Audio Line Request .......................................... 99  
Ericsson Audio Mode Selection .................................... 100  
Ericsson Audio Ring Signal........................................... 101  
Ericsson Local Audio Mode .......................................... 102  
Ericsson Microphone Mode........................................... 102  
Ericsson Music Mute Indication Request...................... 103  
Ericsson SET External Volume Control........................ 103  
5. Data - CSD/HSCSD.............................................................................................. 105  
5.1 AT+CBST  
Select Bearer Service Type............................................ 105  
5
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
5.2 AT+CRLP  
Radio Link Protocol ....................................................... 107  
6. Data - GPRS..........................................................................................................109  
6.1 AT+CGACT  
6.2 AT+CGATT  
PDP Context Activate or Deactivate.............................. 109  
GPRS Attach or Detach ................................................. 110  
6.3 AT+CGDATA Enter Data State.............................................................. 111  
6.4 AT+CGDCONT Define PDP Context....................................................... 112  
6.5 AT+CGEREP GPRS Event Reporting .................................................. 114  
6.6 AT+CGPADDR Show PDP Address ........................................................ 115  
6.7 AT+CGQMIN Quality of Service Profile (Minimum Acceptable)........ 116  
6.8 AT+CGQREQ Quality of Service Profile (Requested) .......................... 118  
6.9 AT+CGREG  
6.10 AT+CGSMS  
GPRS Network Registration Status ............................... 121  
Select Service for MO SMS Messages .......................... 122  
7. Data - HSCSD .......................................................................................................123  
7.1 AT+CHSC  
7.2 AT+CHSD  
7.3 AT+CHSN  
7.4 AT+CHSR  
7.5 AT+CHSU  
HSCSD Current Call Parameters ................................... 123  
HSCSD Device Parameters............................................ 124  
HSCSD Non Transparent Call Configuration................ 125  
HSCSD Parameters Report ............................................ 126  
HSCSD Automatic User Initiated Upgrading................ 127  
8. Fax..........................................................................................................................129  
8.1 AT*E2FAX Ericsson M2M Fax Comm. Baud Rate Modification .... 129  
8.2 Low Level Fax Commands......................................................................... 130  
9. Identification.........................................................................................................131  
9.1 AT  
9.2 AT&F  
9.3 AT&W  
9.4 AT*  
9.5 AT+CGMI  
9.6 AT+CGMM  
9.7 AT+CGMR  
9.8 AT+CGSN  
9.9 ATI  
Attention Command....................................................... 131  
Set to Factory Defined Configuration............................ 131  
Store User Profile........................................................... 131  
List all Supported AT Commands.................................. 132  
Read MS Manufacturer Identification ........................... 132  
Read MS Model Identification....................................... 132  
Read MS Revision Identification................................... 133  
Read MS Product Serial Number Identification ............ 133  
Identification Information .............................................. 133  
Request Modem Capabilities List .................................. 134  
9.10 AT+GCAP  
10. Interface ................................................................................................................135  
10.1 AT+CPIN  
10.2 AT&C  
10.3 AT&D  
10.4 AT&S  
10.5 AT+WS46  
10.6 ATE  
10.7 ATV  
10.8 ATZ  
10.9 AT+CMUX  
10.10 AT+CRES  
PIN Control .................................................................... 135  
Circuit 109 (DCD) Control ............................................ 135  
Circuit 108 (DTR) Response.......................................... 135  
Circuit 107 (DSR) Response.......................................... 136  
Mode Selection............................................................... 136  
Command Echo.............................................................. 137  
DCE Response Format................................................... 137  
Reset to Default Configuration ...................................... 138  
Switch to 07.10 Multiplex Protocol ............................... 139  
Restore SMS Settings..................................................... 141  
6
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10.11 AT+ICF  
10.12 AT+IFC  
10.13 AT+ILRR  
10.14 AT+IPR  
10.15 AT*E2ESC  
Cable Interface Character Format.................................. 141  
DTE-DCE Local Flow Control...................................... 142  
Cable Interface Local Rate Reporting ........................... 143  
Cable Interface Port Command ..................................... 143  
M2M Escape Sequence Guard Time ............................. 144  
11. Network................................................................................................................. 145  
11.1 AT*E2CD  
11.2 AT*E2EMM  
11.3 AT*E2SPN  
11.4 AT*EALS  
11.5 AT*ECSP  
11.6 AT*EPNR  
11.7 AT*EPNW  
11.8 AT*E2SSN  
11.9 AT*ESLN  
11.10 AT+CIMI  
11.11 AT+CLCK  
11.12 AT+CNUM  
11.13 AT+COLP  
11.14 AT+COPS  
11.15 AT+CREG  
11.16 AT*ECPI  
11.17 AT*E2NBTS  
Ericsson M2M Cell Description .................................... 145  
Ericsson M2M Engineering Monitoring Mode ............. 147  
M2M Service Provider Indication ................................. 153  
Ericsson Request ALS Status ........................................ 153  
Ericsson Customer Service Profile ................................ 154  
Ericsson Read SIM Preferred Network ......................... 155  
Ericsson Write SIM Preferred Network ........................ 156  
Ericsson M2M SIM Serial Number............................... 156  
Ericsson Set Line Name................................................. 157  
Subscriber Identification................................................ 158  
Facility Lock.................................................................. 158  
Subscriber Number ........................................................ 160  
Connected Line Identification Presentation................... 161  
Operator Selection ......................................................... 163  
Network Registration..................................................... 164  
Ciphering Indicator........................................................ 165  
Ericsson M2M Neighbour BTS..................................... 167  
12. Phonebook ............................................................................................................ 169  
12.1 AT*E2PBCS  
12.2 AT*ESAG  
12.3 AT*ESCG  
12.4 AT*ESCN  
12.5 AT*ESDG  
12.6 AT*ESDI  
12.7 AT*ESGR  
12.8 AT*EGIR  
12.9 AT*ESNU  
12.10 AT+CPBF  
12.11 AT+CPBR  
12.12 AT+CPBS  
12.13 AT+CPBW  
Ericsson M2M Phonebook Check Sum......................... 169  
Ericsson Add to Group .................................................. 169  
Ericsson Create Group................................................... 170  
Ericsson Set Credit Card Number.................................. 171  
Ericsson Delete Group................................................... 173  
Ericsson Delete Group Item........................................... 173  
Ericsson Group Read ..................................................... 174  
Ericsson Group Item Read............................................. 174  
Ericsson Settings Number.............................................. 175  
Phonebook Find............................................................. 176  
Phonebook Read ............................................................ 176  
Phone Storage ................................................................ 178  
Phonebook Write ........................................................... 179  
13. Short Message Services - Point to Point............................................................. 181  
13.1 AT+CPIN  
13.2 AT+CGSMS  
13.3 AT+CPMS  
13.4 AT+CSCA  
13.5 AT+CMGF  
13.6 AT+CMGW  
13.7 AT+CMGS  
PIN Control.................................................................... 181  
Select Service for MO SMS Messages.......................... 181  
Preferred Message Storage ............................................ 181  
Service Centre Address.................................................. 183  
Message Format............................................................. 184  
Write Message to Memory ............................................ 184  
Send Message ................................................................ 187  
7
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
13.8 AT+CMSS  
13.9 AT+CMGC  
13.10 AT+CNMI  
13.11 AT+CMGR  
13.12 AT+CMGL  
13.13 AT+CMGD  
13.14 AT+CSDH  
13.15 AT+CSMP  
13.16 AT+CSCS  
13.17 AT+CSMS  
Send From Storage......................................................... 190  
Send Command .............................................................. 191  
New Message Indications to TE .................................... 194  
Read Message................................................................. 198  
List Message................................................................... 203  
Delete Message .............................................................. 209  
Show Text Mode Parameters ......................................... 209  
Set Text Mode Parameters ............................................. 210  
Select Character Set ....................................................... 211  
Select Message Service.................................................. 212  
14. Short Message Services - Cell Broadcast............................................................215  
14.1 AT+CNMI  
14.2 AT+CSCB  
New Message Indications to TE .................................... 215  
Select Cell Broadcast Message Type ............................. 215  
15. SIM Application Toolkit......................................................................................217  
15.1 AT+CPIN  
PIN Control .................................................................... 217  
SIM Application Toolkit Settings .................................. 217  
M2M STK Display Text ................................................ 218  
M2M STK Get Inkey ..................................................... 219  
M2M STK Get Input...................................................... 221  
M2M STK Select Item................................................... 224  
15.2 AT*E2STKS  
15.3 AT*E2STKD  
15.4 AT*E2STKG  
15.5 AT*E2STKI  
15.6 AT*E2STKL  
15.7 AT*E2STKM M2M STK Set Up Menu................................................ 226  
15.8 AT*E2STKN  
15.9 AT*E2STKC  
15.10 *E2STKE  
15.11 *E2STKP  
15.12 *E2STKU  
15.13 *E2STKR  
M2M STK Envelope (Menu Selection) ......................... 228  
M2M STK Set Up Call .................................................. 228  
STK Send Short Message............................................... 230  
STK Send SS.................................................................. 231  
STK Send USSD............................................................ 232  
STK Refresh................................................................... 233  
15.14 AT*E2STKTO SIM Application Toolkit Settings .................................. 233  
16. Supplementary Services.......................................................................................235  
16.1 AT+CPIN  
16.2 AT+CACM  
16.3 AT+CAMM  
16.4 AT+CAOC  
16.5 AT+CPUC  
16.6 AT*EDIF  
16.7 AT*EIPS  
16.8 AT*ELIN  
16.9 AT*E2SSD  
16.10 AT*E2SSI  
16.11 AT+CCFC  
16.12 AT+CCWA  
16.13 AT+CHLD  
16.14 AT+CLIP  
16.15 AT+CLIR  
16.16 AT+CSSN  
PIN Control .................................................................... 235  
Accumulated Call Meter ................................................ 235  
Accumulated Call Meter Maximum............................... 236  
Advice of Charge ........................................................... 237  
Price Per Unit and Currency Table ................................ 238  
Ericsson Divert Function................................................ 239  
Identity Presentation Set ................................................ 240  
Ericsson Line Set............................................................ 241  
M2M Supplementary Service Dispatch ......................... 241  
M2M Supplementary Service Indications...................... 242  
Call Forwarding number and Conditions....................... 247  
Call Waiting ................................................................... 249  
Call Hold and Multiparty ............................................... 251  
Call Line Identification Presentation ............................. 252  
Calling Line Identification Restriction........................... 253  
Supplementary Service Notification .............................. 255  
8
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16.17 AT+CUSD  
Unstructured Supplementary Service Data.................... 257  
17. Alphabetical Listing of AT Commands ............................................................. 261  
9
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
10  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part 1: Overview  
Product Photo/Illustration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Introduction  
1.1 Target Users  
GM29 modems are designed to be integrated into machine-machine or  
man-to-machine communications applications. They are intended to be  
used by manufacturers, system integrators, applications developers and  
developers of wireless communications equipment.  
1.2 Prerequisites  
It is assumed that the person integrating the GM29 into an application  
has a basic understanding of the following:  
• GSM networking;  
• Wireless communication and antennas (aerials);  
• AT commands;  
• ITU-T standard V.24/V.28;  
• Micro controllers and programming;  
• Electronic hardware design.  
1.3 Manual Structure  
The manual is composed of four parts:  
Part 1- Overview  
This section provides a broad overview of the GM29 and includes a list  
of abbreviations used in the manual.  
Part 2 - Integrating the Modem  
This section describes each of the signals available on the GM29  
modem, along with mechanical information. The section also provides  
you with design guidelines and explains what is needed to  
commercialise an application from a regulatory point of view.  
Part 3 - Using AT Commands  
This section lists all the AT commands relevant to the GM29, including  
their associated parameters. The purpose of part 4 is to give you detailed  
information about the function of each command in the AT command  
set.  
13  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
2. GM29 Modem  
2.1 Description  
The dual band EGSM 900/1800MHz GM29 is a GSM/GPRS serial  
modem. The modem is a powerful and flexible device that can be used  
in a wide range of telemetry and telematics applications that rely on the  
remote exchange of data, voice, SMS or faxes via the GSM cellular  
network.  
Small and lightweight, the GM29 has standard connectors and an  
integral SIM card reader making it easy and quick to integrate. As well  
as providing a standard RS232 serial communication interface the  
GM29 also has an audio interface allowing an analogue handset to be  
connected. When the GM29 is integrated into an external application, a  
wireless communications system is created.  
A typical end-to-end system consists of a micro controller in an external  
application communicating, via the GM29 modem, with a remote  
terminal or host using the GSM network. The micro controller uses a set  
of AT commands to control the modem, and to set up the end-to-end  
communications link, via its 9-way RS232 serial interface.  
GM29 serial modems are intended to be used by manufacturers, system  
integrators, application developers and developers of a wide range of  
equipment and business solutions, typically in the following fields:  
• Security and alarms  
• Vending  
• Monitoring and control  
• Utilities  
• Fleet Management  
2.2 Highlights  
• Dual band, EGSM 900/1800MHz, GSM/GPRS serial modem  
• Flexible plug-and-play device  
• Data: GPRS, HSCSD, CSD, SMS  
• Voice: full rate, enhanced full rate, half rate  
• SMS: mobile-originated, mobile-terminated, cell broadcast  
• Fax: Group 3, Classes 1 & 2  
• RS232 9-way serial interface  
• 5V - 32V d.c. input  
• 4-wire audio connection  
• Antenna connection (FME male)  
• R&TTE type approved  
14  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2. GM29 MODEM  
2.3 GM29 in a Communication System  
Figure 2.1 illustrates the main blocks of a wireless communication  
system using the GM29. It also shows the communication principles of  
the system. The definitions in the figure, as used elsewhere in this  
manual, are in accordance with the recommendations of GSM 07.07.  
• The MS (mobile station) represents the GM29 modem plus SIM  
card. The modem excluding SIM card, is known as the ME (mobile  
equipment).  
• The TE (terminal equipment) is a micro-controller (i.e., a computer)  
and is a part of the application.  
Wireless Communication System  
GSM Network  
Application  
ME status, responses  
TE  
(DTE)  
MS  
(GM29)  
AT commands to control MS  
Figure 2.1 Main Blocks in a Wireless System  
In accordance with the recommendations of ITU-T (International  
Telecommunication Union - Telecommunications Standardisation  
Sector) V.24, the TE communicates with the MS over a serial interface.  
The functions of the GM29 follow the recommendations provided by  
ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute) and ITU-T.  
ETSI specifies a set of AT commands for controlling the GSM element  
of the modem; these commands are supplemented by Sony Ericsson  
specific commands.  
To find out how to work with AT commands, see “Part 3: Using AT  
Commands”, page 51.  
15  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Figure 2.2 illustrates the interface between the modem and the  
application. The entire System Connector Interface is described in  
detail in “Electrical Description”, page 28.  
Power  
and signals  
RJ11  
Audio  
RJ9  
Antenna  
connector  
MS  
(GM29)  
Serial data  
DB9  
TE  
(Application)  
Figure 2.2 The Interface between the modem and the Application  
Note!  
ITU-T standards define TE and TA as DTE (Data Terminal Equipment)  
and DCE (Data Circuit Terminating Equipment) respectively.  
16  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. GM29 MODEM  
2.4 Main Features and Services  
The modem performs a set of telecom services (TS) according to GSM  
standard phase 2+, ETSI and ITU-T. The services and functions of the  
modem are implemented by issuing AT commands over the RS232  
serial interface.  
2.4.1 Types of Mobile Station  
The GM29 is a dual band serial modem with the GSM radio  
characteristics shown in the table below.  
GM29  
GSM900  
E-GSM900  
GSM1800  
Frequency Range (MHz)  
TX: 890-915  
RX: 935-960  
TX: 880-890  
RX: 925-935  
TX: 1710-1785  
RX: 1805-1880  
Channel spacing  
200kHz  
200kHz  
Number of channels  
173 carriers *8 (TDMA)  
GSM: channels 1 to 124  
E-GSM: channels 975 to 1023  
374 carriers *8 (TDMA)  
DCS: channels 512 to 885  
Modulation  
GMSK  
GMSK  
TX phase accuracy  
Duplex spacing  
< 5º RMS phase error (burst)  
45MHz  
< 5º RMS phase error (burst)  
95MHz  
Receiver sensitivity at  
antenna connector  
< –102dBm  
< –102dBm  
Transmitter output power  
at antenna connector  
Class 4  
2W (33dBm)  
Class 1  
1W (30dBm)  
Automatic hand-over between GSM 900 and GSM1800  
2.4.2 Short Message Service  
The modem supports the following SMS services:  
• Sending; MO (mobile-originated) with both PDU (protocol data  
unit) and text mode supported.  
• Receiving; MT (mobile-terminated) with both PDU and text mode  
supported.  
• CBM (cell broadcast message); a service in which a message is sent  
to all subscribers located in one or more specific cells in the GSM  
network (for example, traffic reports). This feature is network  
dependent.  
• SMS STATUS REPORT according to GSM 03.40.  
• SMS COMMAND according to GSM 03.40.  
The maximum length of an SMS message is 160 characters when using  
7-bit encoding. For 8-bit data, the maximum length is 140 characters.  
The modem supports up to 6 concatenated messages to extend this  
function.  
17  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
2.4.3 Voice Calls  
The GM29 offers the capability of mobile originated and mobile  
terminated voice calls, as well as supporting emergency calls.  
Multi-party, call waiting and call deflection features are available.  
Some of these features are network-operator specific.  
For the inter-connection of audio, the modem offers a balanced 4-wire  
analogue interface.  
DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) is supported.  
2.4.4 Data  
The modem supports the following data protocols:  
• GPRS (General Packet Radio Service).  
Modems are Class B terminals, which provide simultaneous  
activation and attachment of GPRS and GSM services. GM29  
modems are GPRS class 8 (4+1) enabled devices, which are capable  
of transmitting in one timeslot per frame (up link), and receiving at a  
maximum of four timeslots per frame (down link).  
• CSD (Circuit Switched Data).  
GM29 modems are capable of establishing a CSD communication at  
9.6kbps.  
• HSCSD (High Speed Circuit Switched Data).  
GM29 supports HSCSD class 2 (2+1) communication, with one  
timeslot per frame capacity in the up link and two timeslots per  
frame capacity in the down link.  
2.4.5 Fax  
The GM29 allows fax transmissions to be sent and received by  
commercial software installed on the application computer. Group 3 fax  
Classes 1 and 2 are supported.  
2.4.6 Supplementary Services  
• Call forwarding  
• Call hold, waiting and multiparty  
• Calling/called number identification  
• Advice of charge  
• USSD  
• Alternate line service  
• Customer service profile  
• Preferred networks  
• Operator selection  
18  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2. GM29 MODEM  
• Network registration  
• Call barring  
• Call transfer  
2.4.7 Serial Communication  
The GM29 enables an end-to-end communication path to be established  
between the external telemetry/telematics application and a remote  
terminal or host, via the GSM network. Once a path has been set up,  
voice or data communication can take place. Serial data with flow  
control according to the RS232 signalling protocol operates between the  
modem and the external application.  
Control of the GM29 is by the external application, via the RS232 serial  
interface, using a set of AT commands. The GM29 supports the full set  
of AT commands according to GSM 07.05 and GSM 07.07. It also  
supports an extended set of Ericsson proprietary AT commands to add  
extra functionality.  
AT commands are used to operate the modem and have a broad range  
of functions including:  
• configuring general parameters of the GM29;  
• setting up and controlling communications to and from the GSM  
network;  
• configuring the modem to communicate across the RS232 serial  
interface;  
• and obtaining GSM network status information.  
For more detail on the AT commands supported by the GM29 see  
“Alphabetical Listing of AT Commands”, page 261.  
2.4.8 Interfacing with the GM29  
The GM29 uses the following industry standard connectors to interface  
with the external application and the GSM network;  
• RJ11 (plug-in power supply connector)  
• RJ9 (handset audio connector)  
• Integral SIM card reader  
• FME male (antenna connector)  
• Sub-D socket, 9 pin (RS232 serial port)  
19  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
2.5 Service and Support  
To contact customer support please use the details below:  
Customer Support  
Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications  
Maplewood Building  
Chineham Business Park  
Basingstoke  
RG24 8YB  
E-mail: [email protected]  
or  
[email protected]  
Information about Sony Ericsson and its products is available on the  
following web site:  
http://www.sonyericsson.com/M2M  
2.6 Precautions  
The GM29 as a stand alone item is designed for indoor use only. To use  
outside it must be integrated into a weatherproof enclosure. Do not  
exceed the environmental and electrical limits as specified in  
“Technical Data”, page 44.  
When designing the power supply arrangements for the GM29 ensure  
that the d.c. cable does not exceed 3 metres. For longer distances please  
contact Sony Ericsson Service and Support.  
20  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. ABBREVIATIONS  
3. Abbreviations  
Abbreviation  
Explanations  
Cell Broadcast Message  
CBM  
CBS  
CSD  
DCE  
DTE  
Cell Broadcast Service  
Circuit Switched Data  
Data Circuit Terminating Equipment  
Data Terminal Equipment  
Dual Tone Multi Frequency  
Enhanced Full Rate  
DTMF  
EFR  
EMC  
ETSI  
Electro-Magnetic Compatibility  
European Telecommunication Standards Institute  
Full Rate  
FR  
GPRS  
GSM  
HR  
General Packet Radio Service  
Global System for Mobile Communication  
Half Rate  
HSCSD  
ITU-T  
High Speed Circuit Switched Data  
International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunications  
Standardisation Sector  
ME  
MO  
MS  
MT  
PDU  
RLP  
RF  
Mobile Equipment  
Mobile Originated  
Mobile Station  
Mobile Terminated  
Protocol Data Unit  
Radio Link Protocol  
Radio Frequency  
Real Time Clock  
RTC  
SIM  
SMS  
TA  
Subscriber Identity Module  
Short Message Service  
Terminal Adapter  
Terminal Equipment  
Telecom Services  
TE  
TS  
21  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
22  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part 2: Integrating the  
Modem  
Product Photo/Illustration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Mechanical Description  
1.1 Overview  
The pictures below show the mechanical design of the GM29 along  
with the positions of the different connectors and mounting holes. The  
GM29 case is made of durable PC/ABS plastic.  
LED  
Antenna  
connector  
Access to  
SIM card  
RS232 connector  
Figure 1.1 GM29 viewed from the left side  
Mounting hole (x2)  
Power  
connector  
Audio  
connector  
Figure 1.2 GM29 viewed from the right side  
25  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Please note the following:  
• Mounting holes positioned at two of the corners make it possible to  
securely bolt the modem into your application.  
• Keypad, display, microphone, speaker and battery are not part of the  
modem.  
• The SIM card is mounted in the modem.  
• The pins and electrical characteristics or the modem’s various  
connectors are described in  
“2. Electrical Description”, page 28.  
• Information about the antenna connector is found in  
“2.3 Antenna Connector”, page 31.  
26  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION  
1.2 Physical Dimensions  
11.0  
55.3  
11.0  
77.4  
Measurements are given in millimetres. See also “Technical Data”,  
page 44.  
27  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
2. Electrical Description  
All electrical connections to the GM29 are protected in compliance with  
the standard air (4kV) and contact (8kV) discharge ESD tests, of  
EN 301 489-1.  
The modem uses the following industry standard connectors:  
• RJ11 6-way (power connector)  
• RJ9 4-way (handset connector)  
• SIM card reader  
• FME male coaxial jack (antenna connector)  
• Sub-D socket, 9 pin (RS232 serial port)  
2.1 Power Connector  
An RJ11 6-way connector, as shown and described below, serves as a  
means of supplying and controlling d.c. power to the modem.  
The supply voltage, VCC, required by the modem is in the range 5V -  
32V d.c. Application of the supply voltage does not switch the modem  
on. To do so an additional active-high control signal, TO_IN, must be  
applied for > 0.2s.  
A second active-high control signal, HR_IN, can be used to switch the  
modem off when applied for 1 - 2 seconds, or can be used to perform a  
hardware reset when applied for > 3.5s.  
TO_IN and HR_IN are referenced to GND (pin 6 on the connector).  
VCC and GND are reverse polarity and overvoltage protected.  
6
5
4
3
2
1
1 VCC  
2 n/c  
3 HR_IN  
4 TO_IN  
5 n/c  
6 GND  
28  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2. ELECTRICAL DESCRIPTION  
The power connector electrical characteristics are listed below:  
Pin Signal  
Dir  
Limits  
Description  
1
2
3
VCC  
-
I
5 - 32V  
Positive power input  
No connection  
-
I
-
HR_IN  
–0.5 - 32V  
Active high control line used to switch  
off or reset the modem  
V
> 5V, V < 2V  
IH  
IL  
Power off: 1s < t < 2s  
Hard reset: t > 3.5s  
4
TO_IN  
I
–0.5 - 32V  
Active high control line used to switch  
on the modem  
V
> 5V, V < 2V  
IH  
IL  
Power on: t > 0.2s  
5
6
-
-
I
-
-
No connection  
GND  
Negative power (ground) input and  
return path for TO_IN and HR_IN  
2.2 Audio Connector  
A 4-way RJ9 connector, as shown below, allows a telephone handset to  
be plugged into the modem, giving access to the microphone and  
earpiece signals. The connector may also be used to drive other  
analogue audio sub-systems or devices.  
Although the GM29 is pre-configured to work with a range of handsets,  
the audio interface is flexible and its performance can be configured,  
using AT commands, to match a particular handset or audio subsystem.  
4
3
2
1
1 MICN  
2 BEARN  
3 BEARP  
4 MICP  
29  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Audio signal descriptions are listed below:  
Pin  
Signal  
Dir  
Description  
1
2
3
4
MICN  
BEARN  
BEARP  
MICP  
I
Microphone negative input  
Earpiece negative output  
Earpiece positive output  
Microphone positive input  
O
O
I
MICP and MICN are balanced differential microphone input signals.  
These inputs are compatible with an electret microphone.  
BEARP and BEARN are the speaker output signals. These are  
differential-mode outputs. The electrical characteristics are given in the  
table below.  
Parameter  
Limit  
Output level (differential)  
≥4.0Vpp  
≥2.8Vpp  
≤5%  
Output level (dynamic load = 32Ω)  
Distortion at 1kHz and maximum output level  
Offset, BEARP to BEARN  
±30mV  
≥40dB  
Ear-piece mute-switch attenuation  
The following table shows the ear piece impedances that can be  
connected to BEARP and BEARN.  
Ear piece model  
Impedance  
Tolerance  
Dynamic ear piece  
Dynamic ear piece  
Piezo ear piece  
[32Ω + 800µH] // 100pF  
[150Ω + 800µH] // 100pF  
1kΩ + 60nF  
±20%  
±20%  
±20%  
30  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. ELECTRICAL DESCRIPTION  
2.3 Antenna Connector  
The antenna connector allows transmission of radio frequency (RF)  
signals between the modem and an external customer-supplied antenna.  
The modem is fitted with a 50Ω, FME male coaxial jack as shown  
below.  
RF Signal  
GND  
The table below shows the antenna electrical characteristics:  
Parameter  
Limit  
Description  
Nominal impedance  
50Ω (SWR better than  
2.5:1)  
2 Watt peak (Class 4)  
1 Watt peak (Class 1)  
Better than –102dBm  
Better than –102dBm  
Extended GSM900  
GSM1800  
Output Power  
Extended GSM900  
GSM1800  
Static Sensitivity  
31  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
2.4 SIM Card Reader  
The GM29 is fitted with a SIM card reader designed for 3V and 5V SIM  
cards. It is the flip-up type which is lockable in the horizontal position  
and is accessed through a removable panel as shown below.  
The SIM card reader includes a SIM presence switch. This ensures that  
when a SIM card is inserted or removed while the GM29 is turned ON,  
it will reset.  
32  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. ELECTRICAL DESCRIPTION  
2.5 RS232 Serial Port  
The modem supports a standard RS232 serial interface (EIA/TIA 574)  
via its 9 pin Sub-D connector, shown below. In line with serial  
communication terminology the GM29 serial modem should be  
considered as the data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE) and the  
external application or computer as the data terminating equipment  
(DTE).  
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
1 DCD  
2 RD  
3 TD  
4 DTR  
5 GND  
6 DSR  
7 RTS  
8 CTS  
9 RI  
The electrical characteristics of the serial port signals are shown below:  
Pin Signal  
Dir  
Voltage  
levels  
Description  
1
2
3
4
DCD  
RD  
O
O
I
> +4V  
< –4V  
Data carrier detect  
Received data  
> +4V  
< –4V  
TD  
> 2V  
< 0.8V  
Transmitted data  
Data terminal ready  
DTR  
I
> 2V  
< 0.8V  
5
6
GND  
DSR  
-
0V  
Ground connection  
Data set ready  
O
> +4V  
< –4V  
7
8
9
RTS  
CTS  
RI  
I
> 2V  
Request to send  
Clear to send  
Ring indicator  
< 0.8V  
O
O
> +4V  
< –4V  
> +4V  
< –4V  
33  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
2.5.1 Serial Data  
The modem supports the standard data character format of 1 start bit,  
8 bit data, no parity plus 1 stop bit, in total 10 bits per character.  
2.5.2 Serial Data Signals - RD, TD  
The default baud rate is 9.6kbps, however higher bit rates up to 460kbps  
are supported. At start-up the GM29 transmits and receives data at the  
default rate of 9.6kbps in either standard AT mode or binary mode (the  
first received data - AT or binary format - determines the operating  
mode). When reprogramming, the transmission rate is automatically  
negotiated by the programming application. Speeds up to 460kbps are  
supported.  
Serial Data From Modem (RD)  
RD is an output signal that the modem uses to send data to the  
application.  
Serial Data To Modem (TD)  
TD is an input signal, used by the application to send data to the modem.  
2.5.3 Control Signals - RTS, CTS, DTR, DSR, DCD, RI  
RTS and CTS are capable of transmitting at 1/10th of the data  
transmission speed for data rates up to 460kbps (byte-oriented flow  
control mechanism).  
Request to Send (RTS)  
Used to condition the DCE for data transmission. The default level is  
high by internal pull up.  
The exact behaviour of RTS is defined by an AT command. Software  
or hardware control can be selected. Hardware flow is the default  
control.  
The application must pull RTS low to communicate with the modem.  
The modem will respond by asserting CTS low, indicating it is ready for  
communication.  
Clear To Send (CTS)  
CTS indicates that the DCE is ready to transmit data. The default level  
is high. You can define the exact behaviour of CTS through an AT  
command, and can select software or hardware flow control.  
34  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2. ELECTRICAL DESCRIPTION  
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)  
DTR indicates that the DTE is ready to transmit and receive data. It also  
acts as a hardware ‘hang-up’, terminating calls when switched high.  
The signal is active low. You can define the exact behaviour of DTR  
with an AT command.  
The DTR line can also be used to switch on the modem when activated  
for 0.2 seconds. The DTR line must be deactivated prior to switching  
off the modem to ensure it switches off (powers down) correctly.  
Data Set Ready (DSR)  
An active DSR signal is sent from the modem to the application (DTE)  
to confirm that a communications path has been established. DSR has  
two modes of operation, settable using the AT command AT&S.  
Data Carrier Detect (DCD)  
DCD indicates that the DCE is receiving a valid carrier (data signal)  
when low. You can define the exact behaviour of DCD with an AT  
command.  
Ring Indicator (RI)  
RI indicates that a ringing signal is being received by the DCE when  
low. You can define the exact behaviour or RI with an AT command.  
2.6 Real Time Clock  
The GM29 contains a real time clock (RTC) to maintain accurate  
timekeeping and to enable “timestamping” of messages.  
The RTC is powered when d.c. power is connected to the modem AND  
the modem is switched on. If the d.c. supply fails, a stored energy device  
within the GM29 provides back-up power to maintain the RTC for at  
least 12 hours.  
2.7 Software Updates  
It is possible and sometimes necessary to update the GM29 software.  
Updates must be carried out by a Sony Ericsson approved technician.  
Please contact your supplier for details (see “Service and Support”,  
page 9).  
35  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
3. Operation  
3.1 Switching On the Modem  
There are two ways to switch on the modem, once power is applied.  
• either assert TO_IN high for > 0.2s;  
• or activate the RS232 control line DTR, high for > 0.2s.  
The modem is fully operational after 4 seconds. Logging onto a network  
may take longer than this and is outside the control of the modem.  
The modem can be configured to start up at the time power is applied  
by permanently tying power connector signals TO_IN (pin 4) and VCC  
(pin 1) together. In this case DTR must be used to switch the modem on  
again after it has been switched off or reset, while power is still applied.  
3.2 Switching Off the Modem  
There are two ways to switch off (power down) the modem as described  
below:  
• either use the AT+CFUN command;  
• or assert HR_IN high for 1 - 2 seconds. A delay of up to 10s is  
experienced as the modem logs off the network.  
Note!  
The DTR line must be deactivated prior to switching off the modem to  
ensure the unit switches off correctly.  
3.3 Resetting the Modem  
A full system reset, independent of the status of the software, may be  
applied to the modem as follows:  
• assert HR_IN high for > 3.5s.  
36  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3. OPERATION  
3.4 Operating States/LED  
The modem has a green LED, as depicted below, which is used to  
indicate various operating states. These states are described in  
following table.  
LED  
Operating State  
LED Status  
After switching on the modem  
Switch off (Power down) or power removed  
Standby or talk  
On after 4s  
Off  
Flashing  
On  
No network, network search, no SIM card, no PIN  
entered  
Notes!  
Switch off (Power Down): DC power is applied but the modem is  
switched OFF.  
Standby: The GM29 is switched ON and camped on to the network. No  
call in progress.  
Talk: The GM29 is switched ON and a voice/data call is in progress.  
37  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
4. Hints for Integrating the Modem  
This chapter gives you advice and helpful hints on how to integrate the  
GM29 into your application from a hardware perspective.  
Please read and consider the information under the following headings  
before starting your integration work:  
• Safety advice and precautions.  
• Installation of the modem.  
• Antenna.  
4.1 Safety Advice and Precautions  
4.1.1 General  
• Always ensure that use of the modem is permitted. The modem may  
present a hazard if used in proximity to personal medical electronic  
devices. As a rule, the modem must not be used in hospitals, airports  
or planes.  
• Avoid exposing the modem to lighted cigarettes, naked flames or to  
extreme hot or cold temperature.  
• You are responsible for observing your country’s safety standards,  
and where applicable the relevant wiring rules.  
• Never use the modem at a gas station, refuelling point, blasting area  
or in any other environment where explosives may be present.  
• Operating the modem close to other electronic devices, such as  
antennas, television sets, and radios may cause electromagnetic  
interference.  
• Never try to dismantle the modem yourself. There are no  
components inside the modem that can be serviced by the user. If  
you attempt to dismantle the modem, you may invalidate the  
warranty.  
• To protect power supply cables and meet the fire safety requirements  
when the unit is powered from a battery or a high current supply,  
connect a fast 1.25A fuse in line with the positive supply.  
• Do not connect any incompatible component or product to the  
GM29. Note, Sony Ericsson does not warrant against defects, non-  
conformities or deviations caused thereby.  
4.1.2 SIM Card  
• Before handling the SIM card in your application, ensure that you  
are not charged with static electricity. Use proper precautions to  
avoid electrostatic discharges.  
38  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4. HINTS FOR INTEGRATING THE MODEM  
• When the SIM card hatch is opened, the SIM card connectors lie  
exposed under the SIM card holder. CAUTION: Do not touch these  
connectors! If you do, you may release an electrical discharge that  
could damage the modem or the SIM card.  
• When designing your application, the SIM card’s accessibility  
should be taken into account. We always recommend that you have  
the SIM card protected by a PIN code. This will ensure that the SIM  
card cannot be used by an unauthorized person.  
4.1.3 Antenna  
• If the antenna is to be mounted outside, consider the risk of  
lightning. Follow the instructions provided by the antenna  
manufacturer.  
• Never connect more than one modem to a single antenna. The  
modem can be damaged by radio frequency energy from the  
transmitter of another modem.  
• Like any mobile station, the antenna of the modem emits radio  
frequency energy. To avoid EMI (electromagnetic interference), you  
must determine whether the application itself, or equipment in the  
application’s proximity, needs further protection against radio  
emission and the disturbances it might cause. Protection is secured  
either by shielding the surrounding electronics or by moving the  
antenna away from the electronics and the external signals cable.  
• The modem and antenna may be damaged if either come into contact  
with ground potentials other than the one in your application.  
Beware, ground potential are not always what they appear to be.  
• In the final application, the antenna must be positioned more than  
20cm away from human bodies. When this rule cannot be applied,  
the application designer is responsible for providing the SAR  
measurement test report and declaration.  
4.2 Installation of the Modem  
4.2.1 Where to Install the Modem  
There are several conditions which need to be taken into consideration  
when designing your application as they might affect the modem and its  
function. They are:  
Environmental Conditions  
The modem must be installed so that the environmental conditions  
stated in the Technical Data chapter, such as temperature, humidity and  
vibration are satisfied. Additionally, the electrical specifications in the  
Technical Data section must not be exceeded.  
39  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Signal Strength  
The modem has to be placed in a way that ensures sufficient signal  
strength. To improve signal strength, the antenna can be moved to  
another position. Signal strength may depend on how close the modem  
is to a radio base station. You must ensure that the location at which you  
intend to use the modem, is within the network coverage area.  
Degradation in signal strength can be the result of a disturbance from  
another source, for example an electronic device in the immediate  
vicinity. More information about possible communication disturbances  
can be found in section 4.3.5, page 42.  
When an application is completed, you can verify signal strength by  
issuing the AT command AT+CSQ. See “AT+CSQ Signal Strength”,  
page 89.  
Tip!  
Before installing the modem, use an ordinary mobile telephone to check  
a possible location for it. In determining the location for the modem and  
antenna, you should consider signal strength as well as cable length  
Connection of Components to GM29  
The integrator is responsible for the final integrated system. Incorrectly  
designed or installed, external components may cause radiation limits to  
be exceeded. For instance, improperly made connections or improperly  
installed antennas can disturb the network and lead to malfunctions in  
the modem or equipment.  
Network and Subscription  
• Before your application is used, you must ensure that your chosen  
network provides the necessary telecommunication services.  
Contact your service provider to obtain the necessary information.  
• If you intend to use SMS in the application, ensure this is included in  
your (voice) subscription.  
• Consider the choice of the supplementary services described in  
section “2.4.2 Short Message Service”, page 17.  
4.2.2 How to Install the Modem  
Power Supply  
• Use a high-quality power supply cable with low resistance. This  
ensures that the voltages at the connector pins are within the allowed  
range, even during the maximum peak current.  
• When the unit is powered from a battery or a high current supply,  
connect a fast 1.25A fuse in line with the positive supply. This  
protects the power cabling and modem.  
40  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. HINTS FOR INTEGRATING THE MODEM  
Securing the modem  
• Before securing the modem take into account the amount of  
additional space required for the mating connectors and cables that  
will be used in the application.  
• Where access is restricted, it may be easier to connect all the cables  
to the modem prior to securing it in the application.  
• Securely attach the GM29 modem to the host application using two  
3mm diameter pan-head screws of appropriate length as shown  
below.  
Caution! Do not exceed a torque of 25Ncm when tightening the fixings screws.  
Excessive torque applied to the screws can crack the plastic case.  
4.3 Antenna  
4.3.1 General  
The antenna is the component in your system that maintains the radio  
link between the network and the modem. Since the antenna transmits  
and receives electromagnetic energy, its efficient function will depend  
on:  
• the type of antenna (for example, circular or directional);  
• the placement of the antenna;  
• communication disturbances in the vicinity in which the antenna  
operates.  
In the sections below, issues concerning antenna type, antenna  
placement, antenna cable, and possible communication disturbances are  
addressed.  
In any event, you should contact your local antenna manufacturer for  
additional information concerning antenna type, cables, connectors,  
antenna placement, and the surrounding area. You should also  
41  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
determine whether the antenna needs to be grounded or not. Your local  
antenna manufacturer might be able to design a special antenna suitable  
for your the application.  
4.3.2 Antenna Type  
Make sure that you choose the right type of antenna for the modem.  
Consider the following requirements:  
• the antenna must be designed for the dual frequency bands in use:  
EGSM/GSM900/1800;  
• the impedance of the antenna and antenna cable must be 50Ω;  
• the antenna output-power handling must be a minimum of 2W;  
• the VSWR value should be less than 3:1 to avoid damage to the  
modem.  
4.3.3 Antenna Placement  
The antenna should be placed away from electronic devices or other  
antennas. The recommended minimum distance between adjacent  
antennas, operating in a similar radio frequency band, is at least 50cm.  
If signal strength is weak, it is useful to face a directional antenna at the  
closest radio base station. This can increase the strength of the signal  
received by the modem.  
The modem’s peak output power can reach 2W. RF field strength varies  
with antenna type and distance. At 10cm from the antenna the field  
strength may be up to 70V/m and at 1m it will have reduced to 7V/m.  
In general, CE-marked products for residential and commercial areas,  
and light industry can withstand a minimum of 3V/m.  
4.3.4 The Antenna Cable  
Use 50Ω impedance low-loss cable and high-quality 50Ω impedance  
connectors (frequency range up to 2GHz) to avoid RF losses. Ensure  
that the antenna cable is as short as possible.  
The Voltage Standing-Wave Ratio (VSWR) may depend on the  
effectiveness of the antenna, cable and connectors. In addition, if you  
use an adapter between the antenna cable and the antenna connector, it  
is crucial that the antenna cable is a high-quality, low-loss cable.  
Minimize the use of extension cables, connectors and adapters. Each  
additional cable, connector or adapter causes a loss of signal power.  
4.3.5 Possible Communication Disturbances  
Possible communication disturbances include the following:  
42  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4. HINTS FOR INTEGRATING THE MODEM  
• Noise can be caused by electronic devices and radio transmitters.  
• Path-loss occurs as the strength of the received signal steadily  
decreases in proportion to the distance from the transmitter.  
• Shadowing is a form of environmental attenuation of radio signals  
caused by hills, buildings, trees or even vehicles. This can be a  
particular problem inside buildings, especially if the walls are thick  
and reinforced.  
• Multi-path fading is a sudden decrease or increase in the signal  
strength. This is the result of interference caused when direct and  
reflected signals reach the antenna simultaneously. Surfaces such as  
buildings, streets, vehicles, etc., can reflect signals.  
• Hand-over occurs as you move from one cell to another in the GSM  
network. Your mobile application call is transferred from one cell to  
the next. Hand-over can briefly interfere with communication and  
may cause a delay, or at worst, a disruption.  
4.4 Accessories  
The GM29 has been type approved together with a range of accessories  
including:  
1. AC-DC Power Adaptor with customised d.c. lead  
(Model # AD-0901000BS)  
Input: 230Va.c., 50Hz, 2m mains lead (UK and Euro plug options)  
Output: 9Vd.c., 1A. 2m d.c. lead with RJ11 connector. CE marked.  
2. Dual Band Minimag Antenna (900/1800MHz)  
(Model # 1140.26-FME/F)  
Magnetic-mount antenna, 0dB radiator, 2.6m RG174 cable with  
FME female connector.  
3. Dual Band Antenna (900/1800MHz)  
(Model # EHD1890-FME/F)  
Bulkhead-mount antenna, 0dB radiator, 0.8m low loss cable with  
FME female connector.  
4. RS232 9-way Serial Cable  
(Model # C-E-RS232-2M)  
2m, 9-way cable, DB9 (female) to DB9 (male) connectors.  
Please contact Sony Ericsson distribution channels for availability.  
43  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
5. Technical Data  
Data Features  
CSD  
Up to 9.6kbps  
HSCSD (2+1)  
Up to 19.2kbps  
GPRS Class B (4+1)  
- P channels  
- Coding schemes CS1 - CS4  
85.6kbps (subject to network support and  
terminal location)  
GSM  
07.10 multiplexing protocol  
Short Message Service Features  
Text and PDU  
Point to point (MT/MO)  
Cell broadcast  
SMS  
concatenation of up to 6 SMS  
Voice Features  
Full Rate, Enhanced Full Rate and Half Rate  
(FR/EFR/HR)  
Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF  
Fax Features  
Group 3  
Class 1 and 2  
Data Storage  
SMS storage capacity  
40 in ME  
In addition, the unit can handle as many  
SMS as the SIM can store  
Phone book capacity  
100  
44  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5. TECHNICAL DATA  
Power Supply  
Supply voltage range  
5 - 32V d.c.  
Power Consumption  
Supply voltage  
5V  
12V  
32V  
Vdc  
Power Down Mode  
Av  
Max  
Av  
Max  
Av  
Max  
5
15  
5
15  
20  
50  
µA  
Standby Mode (typical)  
Frequency  
Paging rate  
Av  
Peak  
Av  
Peak  
Av  
Peak  
900MHz  
2
2
26  
26  
110  
120  
9
9
43  
45  
6
6
20  
19  
mA  
mA  
1800MHz  
Talk Mode (typical)  
Frequency  
Power Level  
Av  
Peak  
Av  
Peak  
Av  
Peak  
900MHz  
5
0
220  
170  
1230  
960  
90  
70  
520  
350  
40  
30  
200  
140  
mA  
mA  
1800MHz  
Notes!  
Power Down Mode: DC power is applied but the modem is switched  
OFF.  
Standby Mode: The GM29 is switched ON and camped on to the  
network. No call in progress.  
Talk Mode: The GM29 is switched ON and a voice/data call is in  
progress.  
The power consumption during transmission in Talk Mode is measured  
at maximum transmitted power.  
The power consumption in Standby Mode is measured at the maximum  
paging rate.  
45  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Radio Specifications  
Frequency range  
GM29: EGSM 900MHz and 1800MHz (dual band)  
2W (900MHz) and 1W (1800MHz)  
Maximum RF output  
power  
Antenna impedance  
Static sensitivity  
50Ω  
Better than –102dBm  
Audio Specifications  
Parameter  
Limit  
Output level (differential)  
≥4.0Vpp  
Output level (dynamic load = 32Ω)  
Distortion at 1kHz and maximum output level  
Offset, BEARP to BEARN  
≥2.8Vpp  
≤5%  
±30mV  
≥40dB  
Ear-piece mute-switch attenuation  
Ear piece model  
Impedance  
Tolerance  
Dynamic ear piece  
Dynamic ear piece  
Piezo ear piece  
[32Ω + 800µH] // 100pF  
[150Ω + 800µH] // 100pF  
1kΩ + 60nF  
±20%  
±20%  
±20%  
SIM Card Reader  
Voltage type  
Support for 3 V and 5 V SIM cards  
Electrical Connectors and LED  
Plug-in power supply  
connector  
RJ11 6-way  
Handset audio connector  
Antenna connector  
RS232 port  
RJ9 4-way  
FME male  
Sub-D socket, 9 pin  
Green  
LED  
46  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. TECHNICAL DATA  
Mechanical Specification  
Length  
Width  
77.4mm  
66.4mm  
26.2mm  
<130g  
Height  
Weight  
Environmental specifications  
Operating temperature  
range  
–25°C to +55°C  
Storage temperature  
range  
–40°C to +85°C  
Relative humidity  
5 - 95%, non-condensing  
Stationary vibration,  
sinusoidal  
Displacement: 7.5mm  
Acceleration amplitude: 20m/s² and 40m/s²  
Frequency range: 2-8Hz, 8-200Hz, 200-500Hz  
Stationary vibration,  
random  
Acceleration spectral density (m²/s²):  
0.96, 2.88, 0.96  
Frequency range:  
5-10Hz, 10-200Hz, 200-500Hz, 60min/axis  
Non-stationary vibration,  
including shock  
Shock response spectrum I, peak acceleration:  
3 shocks in each axis and direction;  
300m/s², 11ms  
Shock response spectrum II, peak acceleration:  
3 shocks in each axis and direction;  
1000m/s², 6ms  
Bump  
Acceleration: 250m/s²  
1.2m  
Free fall transportation  
Rolling pitching  
transportation  
Angle: ±35degrees; period: 8s  
Static load  
10kPa  
Low air pressure/high air  
pressure  
70kPa/106kPa  
47  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Certification  
EMC: EN 301 489-1  
EMC: EN 301 489-7  
Safety: EN 60950  
Directive 1999/5/EC  
GSM 3GPP TS 51.010-1  
Tested according to GCF-CC  
48  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY  
6. Declaration of Conformity  
49  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
50  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part 3: Using AT Commands  
Product Photo/Illustration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Introduction to AT Commands  
1.1 Overview  
AT commands, issued from a computer in your application are used to  
control and implement the functions of the modem.  
Using AT commands, the following actions are possible:  
• Control of DCE  
• GPRS  
• Call control  
• Supplementary Service  
• SIM application tool kit  
The GM29 contains a large number of Ericsson-specific commands in  
addition to those implemented in accordance with the GSM and ITU-T  
recommendations. These commands are provided to enhance the  
functions of the modem. The Ericsson-specific commands are identified  
by the asterisk that precedes the command (see the syntax description  
provided below).  
1.2 Syntax Description  
This section provides a brief description of the syntax used for the  
GM29, AT command set. See the ITU-T recommendation V.25ter for  
additional information.  
1.2.1 Conventions  
In this manual, the following conventions are used to explain the AT  
commands.  
<command>  
<parameter>  
The name of the command that is to be entered.  
The parameter values that are defined for a certain  
command.  
<CR>  
The command line is terminated by the Carriage  
Return (or Enter key) or ATS3 command.  
<LF>  
< >  
Line feed character or ATS4 command.  
The term enclosed in angle brackets is a syntactical  
element. The brackets do not appear in the command  
line.  
53  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
[ ]  
Square brackets are used to indicate that a certain item  
is optional. For example, sub-parameters of a  
command or an optional part of a response. The  
brackets do not appear in the command line.  
Value  
The default values of the supported parameters are  
indicated by using bold text when presenting the  
value.  
• Other characters, including ‘?’, ‘=’, parenthesis, etc., appear in  
commands and responses as written.  
• The final result codes OK, ERROR, +CME ERROR: <err> and  
CMS ERROR:<err> (see sections 1.2.3, AT Response Syntax and  
1.3, Error Codes) are not listed under “Possible Responses” for each  
AT command.  
• OK and ERROR are listed if these are the only possible responses.  
1.2.2 AT Command Syntax  
The AT standard is a line-oriented command language. Each command  
is made up of the following three elements:  
• the prefix;  
• the body;  
• the termination character.  
The prefix consists of the letters “AT”, which are derived from the first  
two letters of the word attention. The body is made up of the command,  
the parameter, and if applicable the associated values.  
Commands may be combined in the same command line. Spaces  
between the individual bodies are ignored.  
Basic Syntax Command  
The format of basic syntax commands is as follows:  
AT<command>[=][<parameter>]  
Example! ATL=0<CR> (sets the volume of the speaker)  
Additional commands may follow a command on the same command  
line without any character being required for separation. For the  
command D parameters, see the description for the command in  
question.  
A version of the basic syntax is:  
AT<command><parameter>  
Extended Syntax Command  
• AT+<command>= [<parameter>]  
54  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. INTRODUCTION TO AT COMMANDS  
• AT*<command>=[<parameter>]  
Example! AT+CFUN=0<CR> (powers down the modem)  
If several values are included in the command, they are separated by  
commas. It is also possible to enter commands with no values.  
Additional commands may follow an extended syntax command on the  
same command line if a semicolon (; IRA 3B) is inserted after the  
preceeding extended command as a separator.  
Read Command Syntax  
The read command is used to check the current values of  
parameters. Type ‘?’, after the command line:  
• AT+<command>?  
• AT*<command>?  
• AT<command>?  
Example! AT+CSCS?<CR> (show current character set)  
<CR>“IRA”<CR>(information text response)  
<CR>OK<CR>(final result code response)  
Test Command Syntax  
The test command is used to test whether the command has been  
implemented or to give information about the type of subparameters it  
contains. Type ‘?’, after the command line:  
• AT+<command>=?  
• AT*<command>=?  
Example! AT+CPAS=?<CR> (shows supported values for the response  
parameters)  
<CR>CPAS: (0, 3, 4, 129, 130, 131)<CR> (supported values)  
<CR>OK<CR> (final result code)  
If the indicated <parameter> is not recognized, the result code ERROR  
is issued.  
Note!  
Possible responses are indicated both as <command>:(list of  
supported<parameter>) and (in most cases) the actual range of the  
parameter values.  
1.2.3 AT Response Syntax  
The default mode response shown below, is in text mode. See the  
command V for further details.  
55  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Possible formats for the result codes are:  
• Basic format result code, such as OK. The Basic result code also has  
a numerical equivalent.  
• Extended format result code, prefixed with a plus sign (+) or an  
asterisk (*):  
– AT+<command>: <parameter >  
– AT*<command>: <parameter>  
where the <parameter> is the result code value, note that a single  
space character separates the colon character from the <parameter>.  
If several values are included in the result code, they are separated by  
commas. It is also possible that a result code has no value. The  
extended syntax result codes have no numerical equivalent. They are  
always issued in alphabetical form.  
• Information text response may contain multiple lines separated by  
<CR>. The TE detects the end of informational text responses by  
looking for a final result code response, such as OK.  
There are two types of result code responses as outlined below:  
Final Result Code  
A final result code indicates to the TE that execution of the command  
is completed and another command may be issued.  
• If you type an implemented AT command, you should get the result  
code OK.  
• If you type an AT command that is not implemented, or which had  
the wrong parameter or syntax, you will get an error result code. It is  
ERROR or, for example, +<command> ERROR followed by an  
error code.  
Final result codes are:  
Value  
General meaning  
OK  
Command executed, no errors  
Invalid command or command line too long  
No dialling possible, wrong mode  
Remote station busy  
ERROR  
NO DIALTONE  
BUSY  
NO ANSWER  
NO CARRIER  
Connection completion time-out  
Link not established or disconnected  
Unsolicited Result Code  
Unsolicited result codes indicate the occurrence of an event not directly  
associated with a command being issued from the TE.  
56  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. INTRODUCTION TO AT COMMANDS  
1.3 Error Codes  
1.3.1 +CME ERROR (Mobile Equipment Error Code)  
This final result code is similar to the regular ERROR result code. If  
+CME ERROR: <err> is the result code for any of the commands in a  
command line, none of the commands in the same command line will  
be executed (neither ERROR nor OK result code shall be returned as a  
result of a completed command line execution). The format of <err> can  
be either numerical or alphabetical, and is set with the +CMEE  
command.  
The table below provides the numerical values for the parameter <err>.  
<err>  
Description Syntax  
0
Phone failure  
1
No connection to phone  
Phone -adaptor link reserved  
Operation not allowed  
Operation not supported  
PH-SIM PIN required  
SIM not inserted  
2
3
4
5
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
30  
SIM PIN required  
SIM PUK required  
SIM failure  
SIM busy  
SIM wrong  
Incorrect password  
SIM PIN2 required  
SIM PUK2 required  
Memory full  
Invalid index  
Not found  
Memory failure  
Text string too long  
Invalid characters in text string  
Dial string too long  
Invalid characters in dial string  
No network service  
57  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<err>  
Description Syntax  
31  
Network time-out  
32  
Network not allowed - emergency calls only  
Unknown  
100  
101- 255  
Reserved by ETS  
1.3.2 +CMS ERROR (Message Service Failure Result Code)  
This final result code indicates an error related to mobile equipment or  
to the network. The operation is similar to the ERROR result code.  
None of the following commands in the same command line will be  
executed. Neither ERROR nor OK result code will be returned. ERROR  
is returned normally when an error is related to syntax or invalid  
parameters. Nevertheless, it always appears when a command fails.  
The syntax is as follows:  
+CMS ERROR: <err>  
Values for the <err> parameter are described in the following table.  
<err>  
Description  
0 - 127  
128 - 255  
300  
GSM 04.11 Annex E-2 values  
GSM 03.40 subclause 9.2.3.22 values  
ME failure  
301  
SMS service of ME reserved  
Operation not allowed  
Operation not supported  
Invalid PDU mode parameter  
Invalid text mode parameter  
SIM not inserted  
302  
303  
304  
305  
310  
311  
SIM PIN required  
312  
PH-SIM PIN required  
SIM failure  
313  
314  
SIM busy  
315  
SIM wrong  
316  
SIM PUK required  
317  
SIM PIN2 required  
318  
SIM PUK2 required  
Memory failure  
320  
58  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. INTRODUCTION TO AT COMMANDS  
<err>  
Description  
321  
322  
330  
331  
332  
340  
500  
- 511  
512-  
Invalid memory index  
Memory full  
SMSC address unknown  
No network service  
Network time-out  
No +CNMA acknowledgment expected  
Unknown error  
Other values in range 256 - 511 are reserved  
Manufacturer specific  
1.4 Examples on How to Use the AT Commands  
After every group of AT commands there is a section where some of the  
more complicated commands are exemplified. For a detailed  
description of the command in question (valid parameter values, AT  
command syntax and Response syntax) you are recommended to see its  
own descriptive section.  
59  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
60  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Call Control  
2.1 AT+CPIN  
PIN Control  
See 3.23, AT+CPIN PIN Control  
2.2 ATA  
Answer Incoming Call  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Answer an incoming  
call  
ATA  
• CONNECT  
• CONNECT <text>  
• NO CARRIER  
• ERROR  
• OK  
Answer and initiate connection to an incoming call.  
<text>  
Description  
19200  
9600  
4800  
2400  
Connected with data bit rate of 19200 bits/s (HSCSD)  
Connected with data bit rate of 9600 bits/s  
Connected with data bit rate of 4800 bits/s  
Connected with data bit rate of 2400 bits/s  
61  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
2.3 ATD  
Dial  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
• Originate a call and  
dial the phone  
number specified in  
the command as  
<dial_string>  
ATD<dial_string>[;]  
• CONNECT  
• CONNECT <text>  
• NO CARRIER  
• ERROR  
• NO DIAL TONE  
• BUSY  
or  
• Do a network  
detect  
• OK  
Dial the phone number  
stored in the mobile  
phone which is  
located by the index  
<I>  
ATD>ME<I>[;]  
ATD>SM<I>[;]  
ATD>LD<I>[;]  
• CONNECT  
• CONNECT <text>  
• NO CARRIER  
• ERROR  
• NO DIAL TONE  
• BUSY  
• OK  
Dial the phone number  
stored in the SIM card  
which is located by the  
index <I>  
• CONNECT  
• CONNECT <text>  
• NO CARRIER  
• ERROR  
• NO DIAL TONE  
• BUSY  
• OK  
Dial the phone number  
stored in the Last  
dialled number list on  
the SIM card, which is  
located by the index  
<I>  
The most recently  
dialled number is  
assumed to have  
<I>="1"  
• CONNECT  
• CONNECT <text>  
• NO CARRIER  
• ERROR  
• NO DIAL TONE  
• BUSY  
• OK  
Redial the last phone  
number dialled.  
Ericsson specific  
ATDL[;]  
...  
Used to initiate a phone connection, which may be data or voice (phone  
number terminated by semicolon). The phone number used to establish  
the connection will consist of digits and modifiers, or a stored number  
specification.  
If the dial string is followed by a semicolon this informs the phone that  
the number is a voice rather than a data number.  
If the dial string is omitted, and the semicolon included, the command  
instructs the ME to do a network detect. If the network is available OK  
is returned.  
Abortability:  
Aborting an ATD command is accomplished by the transmission from  
the DTE to the DCE of any character. A single character shall be  
sufficient to abort the command in progress; however, characters  
62  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2. CALL CONTROL  
transmitted during the first 125 milliseconds after transmission of the  
termination character are ignored. This is to allow the DTE to append  
additional control characters such as line feed after the command line  
termination character.  
<dial_string>  
Description  
“0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7  
8 9 * # +”  
Valid characters for origination  
W
The W modifier is ignored but is included only for  
compatibility purposes  
,
The comma modifier is ignored but is included only for  
compatibility purposes  
T
The T modifier is ignored but is included only for  
compatibility purposes  
P
The P modifier is ignored but is included only for  
compatibility purposes  
<Final Result  
Code>  
Description  
CONNECT  
If connection is successfully established, only valid for data  
connections  
CONNECT  
<text>  
If connection is successfully established, only valid for data  
connections  
NO CARRIER  
Unable to establish a connection or the connection  
attempt was aborted by the user  
ERROR  
An unexpected error occurred while trying to establish the  
connection  
NO DIALTONE  
BUSY  
The mobile phone is being used for a voice call or is not  
within coverage of the network  
The phone number called is engaged, valid for data and  
voice connections  
OK  
Only valid for voice connections  
<text>  
Description  
19200  
9600  
4800  
2400  
Connected with data bit rate of 19200 bits/s (HSCSD)  
Connected with data bit rate of 9600 bits/s  
Connected with data bit rate of 4800 bits/s  
Connected with data bit rate of 2400 bits/s  
63  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
2.4 ATH  
2.5 ATO  
Hang up  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Terminate the call  
ATH  
• ERROR  
• OK  
Signals the MS to terminate an active call.  
Return to Online Data Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Return to on-line data  
mode  
ATO[<value>]  
• CONNECT  
• CONNECT <text>  
• NO CARRIER  
• ERROR  
Switch to the on-line data mode from the on-line command mode during  
an active call. Returns ERROR when not in on-line command mode.  
<value>  
Description  
0
Return to on-line data state from on-line command  
2.6 ATP  
Select Pulse Dialling  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Select pulse dialling  
ATP  
OK  
OK  
Show if the command  
is supported?  
ATP=?  
Command is ignored, and is implemented for compatibility only. It  
would normally cause the next D command to use pulses when dialling  
the number.  
2.7 ATT  
Select Tone Dialling  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Select tone dialling  
ATT  
OK  
OK  
Show if the command  
is supported?  
ATT=?  
Command is ignored, and is implemented for compatibility only. It  
would normally cause the next D command to use tones when dialling  
the number.  
64  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
2. CALL CONTROL  
2.8 ATX  
Call Progress Monitoring Control  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set call progress  
monitoring control  
ATX=[<n>] or ATX[<n>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the current  
setting  
ATX?  
X: <n>  
Show if the command  
is supported?  
ATX=?  
X: (list of supported  
<n>s)  
Defines if the dial-tone detection and busy-tone detection are to be used  
during a call set-up.  
<n>  
Description  
0
Body and dial tone detection off. No line speed reported  
on connection  
1
2
3
4
Body and dial tone detection off. Report line speed on  
connection  
Busy detection on and dial tone detection off. Report line  
speed on connection  
Busy detect off and dial tone on. Report line speed on  
connection  
Busy detect and dial tone detection on. Report line  
speed on connection. Default value  
Note!  
If there is no network available the <n> parameter will decide if “NO  
DIALTONE” or “NO CARRIER” will be returned. If the call recipient  
is busy, the <n> parameter will decide if “BUSY” or “NO CARRIER”  
will be returned.  
2.9 AT+CHUP  
Hang up Call  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request hang-up  
AT+CHUP  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the commands  
is supported  
AT+CHUP=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Causes the TA to hang-up the current call of the ME.  
If no call is present, but an incoming call is notified, then the incoming  
call shall be rejected.  
65  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
2.10 AT+CMOD Call Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request Call Mode  
AT+CMOD=[<mode>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Shows the current  
setting  
AT+CMOD?  
• +CMOD: <mode>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CMOD=?  
• +CMOD: (list of  
supported  
<mode>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Selects the call mode of further dialing commands (D) or for next  
answering command (A). Mode can be either single or alternating. In  
this ETS, terms “alternating mode” and “alternating call” refer to all  
GSM bearer and teleservices that incorporate more than one basic  
service (voice, data, fax) within one call.  
When single mode is selected the call originating and hang-up  
procedures are similar to procedures specified in ITU-T  
Recommendations V.25ter, T.31 and T.32. In GSM there can be voice  
followed by data (refer to GSM 02.02), alternating voice/data (refer to  
GSM 02.02) and alternating voice/fax calls (refer to GSM 02.03).  
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound  
value.  
Note!  
+CMOD is set to zero after a successfully completed alternating mode  
call. It is set to zero also after a failed answering. The power-up, factory  
(&F) and user resets (Z), also set the value to zero. This reduces the  
possibility that alternating mode calls are originated or answered  
accidentally.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
Single mode. Default value.  
In order to avoid accidental originating or answering of  
alternating calls is <mode> set to single mode in following  
cases:  
- after a successfully completed alternating mode call;  
- after a unsuccessful answering;  
- after successfully execution of the commands &F and Z  
66  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2. CALL CONTROL  
2.11 AT+CVHU Voice Hang-Up  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set Command  
+CVHU=[<mode>]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
Read command  
+CVHU?  
• +CVHU: <mode>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
Test if the command is  
supported  
+CVHU=?  
+CVHU: (list of  
supported <mode>s)  
Selects whether ATH or “drop DTR” causes a voice connection to be  
disconnected or not. Voice connection also includes alternating mode  
calls that are currently in voice mode.  
Note!  
When <mode>=2, this command must be viewed in conjunction with  
the V.25ter command &D, or &D will be ignored.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
“Drop DTR” ignored but OK response given. ATH  
disconnects  
1
2
“Drop DTR” and ATH ignored but OK response given  
“Drop DTR” behavior according to &D setting. ATH  
disconnects. Default value  
2.12 AT+VTS  
DTMF and Tone Generation  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request transmission of  
DTMF tone(s)  
AT+VTS=<DTMF>  
OK  
ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+VTS=?  
OK  
ERROR  
This command allows the transmission of DTMF tones. These tones  
may be used, for example, when announcing the start of a recording  
period. The command is write only. In this profile of commands, the  
command does not operate in data or fax modes of operation  
(+FCLASS=0,1,2-7).  
Note!  
The ATD-command is used only for dialing. It is not possible to  
generate arbitrary DTMF tones using the ATD command.  
67  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Note!  
The AT+VTS command is used only during a voice call.  
<DTMF>  
Description  
ASCII  
character  
string  
An ASCII character string with entries in the set 0-9, #, *, A-  
D separated by commas. Each entry is interpreted as a  
single ASCII character.  
Example: The string “8,9” sends two DTMF tones, “8”  
followed by “9”  
68  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Control and Status  
3.1 ATQ  
Result Code Suppression  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set Result Code  
Suppression  
ATQ[=]<value>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the current  
setting  
ATQ?  
Q: <value>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
ATQ=?  
Q: (list of supported  
<value>s)  
Determines whether or not the DCE transmits result codes to the DTE.  
When result codes are being suppressed, no portion of any intermediate,  
final, or unsolicited result code - header, result text, line terminator, or  
trailer - is transmitted.  
<value>  
Description  
0
1
DCE transmits result codes. Default value  
Result codes are suppressed and not transmitted  
3.2 ATS0  
Automatic Answer Control  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Automatic answer  
control  
ATS0=[<rcnt>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the current  
setting  
ATS0?  
<rcnt>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
ATS0=?  
S0: (list of supported  
<rcnt>s)  
Defines the automatic answering feature of the modem. A non-zero  
value specifies the number of rings before the call is answered.  
Note!  
Call is always answered in the current fax class, regardless of whether  
the incoming call is voice, data, or fax.  
<rcnt>  
Description  
0
Disable automatic answer. Default value  
1-7  
Answer after the specified number of rings  
69  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
3.3 ATS2  
Escape Sequence Character  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set escape sequence  
character  
ATS2=[<esc>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the current  
setting  
ATS2  
<esc>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
ATS2=?  
S2: (list of supported  
<esc>s)  
Defines the character to be used as the escape sequence character when  
switching from on-line data mode to on-line command mode. The  
response to the command is modified to reflect the change.  
<esc>  
Description  
43  
Escape sequence character. Default value  
0 to 255  
Escape sequence character  
Note!  
If the <esc> parameter is set to a value in the range of 128-255, the  
escape sequence detection is disabled.  
3.4 ATS3  
Command Line Termination Character  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set Command Line  
Termination Character  
ATS3=<value>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the current  
setting  
ATS3?  
<value>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
ATS3=?  
S3: (list of supported  
<value>s)  
This S-parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character  
recognised by the DCE from the DTE to terminate an incoming  
command line. It is also generated by the DCE as part of the header,  
trailer, and terminator for result codes and information text, along with  
the S4 parameter.  
The previous value of S3 is used to determine the command line  
termination character for entry of the command line containing the S3  
setting command. However, the result code issued uses the value of S3  
as set during the processing of the command line. For example, if S3  
was previously set to 13 and the command line “ATS3=30” is issued,  
70  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3. CONTROL AND STATUS  
the command line is terminated with a <CR> character (IA5 0/13), but  
the result code issued uses the character with the ordinal value 30 (IA5  
2/14) in place of the <CR>.  
<value>  
Description  
13  
Command line termination character, Default value  
0 to 127  
Command line termination character  
3.5 ATS4  
Response Formatting Character  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set Response  
Formatting Character  
ATS4=<value>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the current  
setting  
ATS4?  
<value>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
ATS4=?  
S4: (list of supported  
<value>s)  
This S-parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character  
generated by the DCE as part of the header, trailer, and terminator for  
result codes and information text, along with the S3 parameter (see the  
description of the V parameter for usage).  
If the value of S4 is changed in a command line, the result code issued  
in response to that command line will use the new value of S4.  
<value>  
Description  
10  
Formatting character. Default value  
Note: ASCII character 10 is equivalent to <LF>  
0 to 127  
Formatting character  
71  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
3.6 ATS5  
Command Line Editing Character (BACKSPACE)  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request Command  
Line Editing Character  
ATS5=<value>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Shows the current  
setting  
ATS5?  
<value>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
ATS5=?  
S5: (list of supported  
<value>s)  
This S-parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character  
recognised by the DCE as a request to delete from the command line the  
immediately preceding character.  
<value>  
Description  
8
Line editing character. Default value  
0 to 127  
Line editing character  
3.7 ATS6  
Blind Dial Delay Control  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Blind dial delay control  
ATS6=[<dly>]  
ATS6?  
OK  
Read the current  
setting  
<dly>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
ATS6=?  
S6: (list of supported  
<dly>s)  
Included for compatibility. No functionality  
<dly>  
Description  
2
Wait two seconds before blind dialling. Default value  
2-255  
Number of seconds to wait before blind dialling  
72  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3. CONTROL AND STATUS  
3.8 ATS7  
Connection Completion Timeout  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set connection  
completion timeout  
ATS7=[<tmo>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the current  
setting  
ATS7?  
<tmo>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
ATS7=?  
S7: (list of supported  
<tmo>s)  
Defines the maximum time allowed between completion of dialling and  
the connection being established. If this time is exceeded then the  
connection is aborted.  
<tmo>  
Description  
50  
Timeout value in seconds. Default value  
1-255  
Timeout value in seconds  
3.9 ATS8  
Comma Dial Modifier Delay Control  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set Comma Dial  
Modifier Delay Control  
ATS8=[<dly>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the current  
setting.  
ATS8?  
<dly>  
Show if the command  
is supported.  
ATS8=?  
S8: (list of supported  
<dly>s)  
Included for compatibility. No functionality  
<dly>  
Description  
2
The value of the dial modifier delay in seconds. Default value  
1-255  
The value of the dial modifier delay in seconds  
73  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
3.10 ATS10  
Automatic Disconnect Delay Control  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set Automatic  
Disconnect Delay  
Control  
ATS10=[<val>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the current  
setting  
ATS10?  
<val>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
ATS10=?  
S10: (list of supported  
<val>s)  
Included for compatibility. No functionality  
<val>  
Description  
2
Remains connected for two tenths of a second. Default value  
1-254  
Number of tenths of a second of delay  
3.11 AT*ECAM Ericsson Call Monitoring  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set Call Monitoring on  
or off  
AT*ECAM=<onoff>  
• OK  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the current status  
for Call Monitoring  
AT*ECAM?  
• *ECAM: <onoff>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the command is  
supported  
AT*ECAM=?  
• *ECAM: list of  
supported <onoff>s  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command activates or deactivates the call monitoring function in  
the ME. When this log function is activated in the ME, the ME informs  
about call events, such as incoming call, connected, hang up etc.  
It is preferable that the current status shall always be sent with result  
code *ECAV when activating the log function. The purpose of this is  
two fold:  
• to gather relevant information for the call log in a TE;  
74  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3. CONTROL AND STATUS  
• to make it possible for the TE to display call state information for an  
ongoing call.  
<onoff>  
Description  
0
1
The call log function is disabled (off). Default value  
The call log function is enabled (on)  
Examples  
AT*ECAM?  
*ECAM: 0  
AT*ECAM=1  
OK  
3.12 AT*EDST  
Ericsson Daylight Saving Time  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set Daylight Saving  
Time  
AT*EDST=<dst>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read current Daylight  
Saving Time  
AT*EDST?  
• *EDST: <dst>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*EDST=?  
• *EDST: (list of  
supported <dst>s)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command sets the daylight saving time hours.  
Note!  
This command affects the MS clock set with the AT+CCLK command.  
To avoid confusion it is recommended the daylight saving time (DST)  
is set with this command before setting the actual local time with  
AT+CCLK.  
<dst>  
Description  
0
1
2
Standard time  
Daylight saving time, +1 hour  
Daylight saving time, +2 hours  
75  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
3.13 AT*EMAR  
Ericsson Master Reset  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Perform a master reset  
in the MS  
AT*EMAR=<phone lock  
code>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Shows if the command  
is supported or not  
AT*EMAR=?  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command requests the MS to reset user data. The user data in the  
MS will be reset to the default values. This command also unlocks the  
MS.  
<phone lock code>  
Description  
String  
Security code (phone lock code) must be verified  
before performing the master reset, see also  
AT+CLCK  
3.14 AT*EPEE  
Ericsson Pin Event  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Requests the MS to  
inform when the PIN  
code has been  
inserted  
AT*EPEE=<onoff>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the command is  
supported  
AT*EPEE=?  
AT*EPEE?  
• *EPEE: (list of  
supported <onoff>s)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the current status  
for PIN Code Request  
• *EPEE: <onoff>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
The command requests the MS to report when the PIN code has been  
inserted and accepted.  
<onoff>  
Description  
0
Request for report on inserted PIN code is not activated  
(off). Default value  
1
Request for report on inserted PIN code is activated (on)  
76  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3. CONTROL AND STATUS  
3.15 TAT+CCLK Set Clock and Date  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set the real time clock  
of the ME  
AT+CCLK=<time>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CCLK?  
• +CCLK: <time>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CCLK=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Sets the real time clock of the ME. If setting fails in an ME, error +CME  
ERROR: <err> is returned. Read command returns the current setting  
of the clock.  
<time>  
Description  
string type  
value  
Format is “yy/mm/dd,hh:mm:ss±zz”, where characters  
indicate year (two last digits), month, day, hour, minutes,  
seconds and time zone (indicates the difference,  
expressed in quarters of an hour, between the local time  
and GMT; range -47...+48), e.g. 6th of May 1994, 22:10:00  
GMT+2 hours reads “94/05/06,22:10:00+08”  
NOTE: If the ME does not support time zone information  
then the three last characters of <time> are not returned  
by +CCLK?  
3.16 AT+CEER  
Extended Error Report  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request an Extended  
Error Report  
AT+CEER  
• +CEER: <report>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CEER=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Causes the TA to return one or more lines of information text <report>.  
Typically, the text will consist of a single line containing the failure  
information given by the GSM network in text format.  
<report>  
Description  
characters  
The total number of characters, including line terminators,  
in the information text shall not exceed 2041 characters.  
Text shall not contain the sequence 0<CR> or OK<CR>  
77  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
3.17 AT+CFUN Set Phone Functionality  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set MS functionality  
AT+CFUN=<fun>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CFUN?  
• +CFUN: <fun>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CFUN=?  
• +CFUN: (list of  
supported <fun>s)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
Selects the level of functionality <fun> in the MS.  
"Full functionality" results in the highest level of power usage. It is  
possible to activate all parts of the modem. Default ON state.  
"Minimum functionality" results in minimum power usage. The modem  
is in a powered OFF state. No functionality can be executed until the  
modem is powered back ON.  
Transitions between states are defined below.  
Initial State  
New State  
Function  
<fun> = 0  
<fun> = 1  
-
Modem is off. No functionality  
<fun> = 0  
Modem was fully active. Active calls are hung  
up and an IMSI detach is sent. The modem then  
powers off  
<fun>  
Description  
0
1
Minimum functionality. Modem is OFF  
Full functionality. Modem is ON  
78  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. CONTROL AND STATUS  
3.18 AT+CIND  
Indicator Control  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set Indicator  
Control  
AT+CIND=[<ind>  
[,<ind>[,…]]]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the current  
setting  
AT+CIND?  
• +CIND: <ind>,<ind>,…  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CIND=?  
• +CIND: (<descr>,(list of  
supported <ind>s)),  
(<descr>,(list of supported  
<ind>s)),…  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Used to set the values of ME indicators. <ind> value 0 means that the  
indicator is off (or in state which can be identified as “off” state), 1  
means that indicator is on (or in a state which is more substantial than  
“off” state), 2 is more substantial than 1, and so on. If the indicator is a  
simple on/off style element, it has values 0 and 1. The number of  
elements is ME specific. If the ME does not allow setting of indicators  
or it is not currently reachable, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned. If a  
certain indicator is not writable, it cannot be set. If the parameter is an  
empty field, the indicator will keep the previous value.  
Test command returns pairs, where string value <descr> is a maximum  
16 character description of the indicator and compound value is the  
allowed values for the indicator. If ME is not currently reachable,  
+CME ERROR: <err> is returned (refer to GSM 07.07).  
<ind>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value shall be in range of corresponding <descr>  
<descr>  
Description  
“signal”  
Signal quality (0-5)  
“service”  
“sounder”  
“message”  
“call”  
Service availability (0-1)  
Sounder activity (0-1)  
Message received (0-1)  
Call in progress (0-1)  
Roaming indicator (0-1)  
“roam”  
“sms full”  
A short message memory storage in the MT has become full  
(1), or memory locations are available (0); i.e. the range is  
(0-1)  
79  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
3.19 AT+CLAC List all available AT Commands  
Command  
Possible Responses  
+CLAC  
<AT Command1> [<CR> <LF> <AT Command2>[…]]  
+CME ERROR: <err>  
+CLAC=?  
+CME ERROR: <err>  
Causes the ME to return one or more lines of AT commands. This  
command has the same functionality as AT*.  
Note!  
This command only returns the AT commands that are available to the  
user.  
3.20 AT+CMEE Mobile Equipment Error  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request GSM Mobile  
Equipment Error  
Control  
AT+CMEE=[<n>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the command  
AT+CMEE?  
• +CMEE: <n>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CMEE=?  
• +CMEE: (list of  
supported <n>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Disables or enables the use of result code +CME ERROR: <err> as an  
indication of an error relating to the functionality of the ME. When  
enabled, ME related errors cause +CME ERROR: <err> final result  
code instead of the regular ERROR final result code. ERROR is  
returned normally when error is related to syntax, invalid parameters, or  
TA functionality. For more information, refer to “+CME ERROR  
(Mobile Equipment Error Code)”, page 57.  
<n>  
Description  
0
Disable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use ERROR  
instead. Default value  
1
2
Enable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use numeric  
<err> values (see page 57)  
Enable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use verbose  
<err> values (see page 57)  
80  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3. CONTROL AND STATUS  
3.21 AT+CMER Mobile Equipment Event Reporting  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set phone  
AT+CMER=[<mode> • +CME ERROR: <err>  
activity status  
[,<ind>[,<bfr>]]]  
AT+CMER?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the  
current setting  
• +CMER: <mode>,<ind>,<bfr>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CMER=?  
• +CMER: (list of supported  
<mode>s), (list of supported  
<ind>s), (list of supported  
<bfr>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Enables or disables the sending of unsolicited result codes from ME to  
TE in the case of key pressings, display changes, and indicator state  
changes. <mode> controls the processing of unsolicited result codes  
specified within this command. <bfr> controls the effect on buffered  
codes when <mode> 1, 2 or 3 is entered. If the ME does not support  
setting, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA; if TA result code  
buffer is full, codes can be buffered in some other place  
or the oldest ones can be discarded  
3
Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE; TA-TE  
link specific inband technique used to embed result  
codes and data when TA is in on-line data mode  
<ind>  
Description  
0
1
No indicator event reporting  
Indicator event reporting using result code +CIEV:  
<ind>,<value>. <ind> indicates the indicator order number  
(as specified for +CIND) and <value> is the new value of  
indicator. Only those indicator events, which are not  
caused by +CIND shall be indicated by the TA to the TE  
<bfr>  
Description  
0
TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this  
command is cleared when <mode> 1...3 is entered  
81  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
3.22 AT+CPAS Phone Activity Status  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Execute Phone Activity  
Status  
AT+CPAS[=<mode>]  
• +CPAS: <pas>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the command is  
supported  
AT+CPAS=?  
• +CPAS:  
(list of supported  
<pas>s)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Returns the activity status <pas> of the ME. It can be used to interrogate  
the ME before requesting action from the phone.  
When the command is executed without the <mode> argument, the  
command returns <pas>-values from 0 to 128 (for supported values se  
table 1 below). When, on the other hand, the command is executed with  
the <mode> argument set to 1, the command may return Ericsson  
specific <pas> values from 129 to 255 (for supported values see the  
table below).  
Test command returns values supported by the ME as a compound  
value: refer to GSM 07.07.  
<pas>  
Description  
0
3
Ready (ME allows commands from TA/TE)  
Ringing (ME is ready for commands from TA/TE, but the  
ringer is active)  
4
Call in progress (ME is ready for commands from TA/TE, but  
a call is in progress)  
129  
In idle state, (operator name/clock/date). This state is a  
sub-state to ‘ready’ (0) and has the following definition:  
In Idle state, that is, operator, clock and date (is set)  
shown on the display  
No conversation or data call in progress  
No sub-menus shown on the display  
4 Only digits, clear, *, NO and # allowed in this mode, not  
changing mode  
130  
131  
Mobile oriented call in progress. This is a sub-state to ‘call  
in progress’  
Mobile terminated call in progress. This is a sub-state to  
‘call in progress’  
<mode>  
Description  
1
Allows the CPAS to return Ericsson specific <pas> values,  
such as 129, 130 and 131  
82  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. CONTROL AND STATUS  
3.23 AT+CPIN  
PIN Control  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request PIN Control  
AT+CPIN=<pin>[,<new  
pin>]  
• +CME ERROR:  
<err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CPIN?  
• +CPIN: <code>  
• +CME ERROR:  
<err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CPIN=?  
• +CME ERROR:  
<err>  
• +CPIN: (supported  
<code>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Sends the password to the ME, which is necessary to make the ME  
operational (SIM PIN, SIM PUK or PH-SIM). If the PIN is to be entered  
twice, the TA autonomously repeats the PIN. If no PIN request is  
pending, no action is taken towards the ME and an error message  
(+CME ERROR <err>) is returned to the TE.  
If the PIN required is PUK, the second pin is required. This second PIN,  
<newpin>, is used to replace the old PIN in the SIM.  
Note!  
Commands which interact with the ME that are accepted when the ME  
has a pending request for SIM PIN, SIM PUK or PH-SIM are: +CGMI,  
+CGMM, +CGMR, +CGSN, +CFUN, +CMEE +CPIN, L and M.  
<pin>,<newpin>  
Description  
string  
The range for the SIM PIN and the PH- SIM PIN is 4 - 8  
digits. The SIM PUK consists of 8 digits  
<code>  
Description  
READY  
SIM PIN  
SIM PUK  
ME is not pending for any password  
ME is waiting SIM PIN to be given  
ME is waiting SIM PUK to be given  
83  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<code>  
Description  
PH-SIM PIN  
SIM PIN2  
ME is waiting PHone-to-SIM card password to be given  
ME is waiting SIM PIN2 to be given. This <code> is  
recommended to be returned only when the last  
executed command resulted in PIN2 authentication  
failure (i.e. +CME ERROR: 17); if PIN2 is not entered  
correctly after the failure, it is recommended that ME does  
not block its operation  
SIM PUK2  
ME is waiting SIM PUK2 to be given. This <code> is  
recommended to be returned only when the last  
executed command resulted in PUK2 authentication  
failure (i.e. +CME ERROR:18); if PUK2 and new PIN2 are not  
entered correctly after the failure, it is recommended that  
ME does not block its operation.  
BLOCKED  
The SIM cards is blocked for the user  
<err>  
Description  
0
Phone failure  
5
PH-SIM PIN required  
SIM not inserted  
SIM PIN required  
SIM PUK required  
SIM failure  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
24  
25  
100  
SIM busy  
SIM wrong  
Incorrect password  
Text string too long  
Invalid characters in text string  
Unknown  
84  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. CONTROL AND STATUS  
3.24 AT+CPWD Change Password  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request facility lock  
AT+CPWD=<fac>,  
<oldpwd>,  
<newpwd>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CPWD=?  
• +CPWD:  
(<fac1>,<pwdlength1>),  
(<fac2>,<pwdlength2>),  
…
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Sets a new password for the facility lock function defined by command  
Facility Lock +CLCK.  
Test command returns a list of pairs which present the available  
facilities and the maximum length of their password.  
<fac>  
Description  
“PS”  
PH-SIM (lock PHone to SIM card) (ME asks password when  
other than current SIM card inserted)  
“SC”  
SIM (lock SIM card) (SIM asks password in ME power-up  
and when this lock command issued)  
“P2”  
“AO”  
“OI”  
SIM PIN2  
BAOC (Barr All Outgoing Calls) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 1)  
BOIC (Barr Outgoing International Calls) (refer GSM 02.88  
clause 1)  
“AI”  
“IR”  
BAIC (Barr All Incoming Calls) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 2)  
BIC-Roam (Bar Incoming Calls when Roaming outside the  
home country) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 2)  
“OX”  
BOIC-exHC (Barr Outgoing International Calls except to  
Home Country) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 1)  
“AB”  
“AG”  
“AC”  
All Barring services (refer GSM 02.30)  
All outGoing barring services (refer GSM 02.30)  
All inComing barring services (refer GSM 02.30)  
<oldpwd>  
Description  
string type  
<oldpwd> shall be the same as password specified for the  
facility from the ME user interface or with the change  
password command, +CPWD  
<newpwd>  
Description  
string type  
<newpwd> is the new password, maximum length of  
password can be determined with <pwdlength>  
85  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<pwdlength>  
Description  
Integer type  
Maximum length of the password for the facility  
<err>  
Description  
0
Phone failure  
3
Operation not allowed  
PH-SIM PIN required  
SIM not inserted  
SIM PIN required  
SIM PUK required  
SIM failure  
5
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
23  
24  
100  
101..255  
SIM busy  
SIM wrong  
Incorrect password  
SIM PIN2 required  
SIM PUK2 required  
Text string too long  
Invalid characters in text string  
Unknown  
Reserved by ETS  
86  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. CONTROL AND STATUS  
3.25 AT+CR  
Service Reporting Control  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set Service Reporting  
Control  
AT+CR=<mode>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read current setting  
AT+CR?  
• +CR: <mode>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the command is  
supported  
AT+CR=?  
• +CR: (list of  
supported  
<mode>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Enables or disables display of intermediate bearer capability reports  
during the handshake phase.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
1
Disable reporting. Default value  
Enable reporting  
Intermediate Result Codes:  
+CR: <serv>  
3.26 AT+CRC  
Cellular Result Code  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set Cellular Result  
Code option  
AT+CRC=[<mode>]  
AT+CRC?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
• +CRC: <mode>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CRC=?  
• +CRC: (list of  
supported  
<mode>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Command controls whether or not;  
• the extended format of incoming call indication;  
• or GPRS network request for PDP context activation;  
• or notification for VBS/VGCS calls is used.  
When enabled, an incoming call is indicated to the TE with unsolicited  
result code +CRING: <type> instead of the normal RING.  
87  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound  
value.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
1
Disables extended format  
Enables extended format  
Unsolicited Result Codes:  
+CRING: <type>  
3.27 AT+CSAS  
Save Settings  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Save Settings  
AT+CSAS[=<profile>]  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Get available  
profiles  
AT+CSAS=?  
• +CSAS: (list of supported  
<profile>s)  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Saves active message service settings to a non-volatile memory. A TA  
can contain several settings profiles. Settings specified in commands  
Service Centre Address +CSCA, Set Message Parameters +CSMP and  
Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB (if implemented) are  
saved. Certain settings may not be supported by the storage (e.g. SIM  
SMS parameters) and therefore can not be saved.  
Test command shall display the supported profile numbers for reading  
and writing of settings.  
<profile>  
Description  
0..255  
Manufacturer specific profile number where settings are  
to be stored. Default value is 0  
88  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. CONTROL AND STATUS  
3.28 AT+CSQ  
Signal Strength  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Execute Signal  
Strength  
AT+CSQ  
• +CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the command is  
supported  
AT+CSQ=?  
• +CSQ: (list of  
supported  
<rssi>s),(list of  
supported <ber>s)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Returns the received signal strength indication <rssi> and channel bit  
error rate <ber> from the ME. Test command returns values supported  
by the TA as compound values.  
<rssi>  
Description  
0
–113dBm or less  
1
–111dBm  
2..30  
31  
99  
–109… –53dBm  
–51dBm or greater  
Not known or not detectable  
<ber>  
Description  
0..7  
As RXQUAL values in the table in GSM 05.08 subclause  
8.2.4  
99  
Not known or not detectable  
89  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
3.29 AT+CTZU  
Automatic Time Zone Update  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Enable and disable  
automatic time zone  
update via NITZ  
AT+CTZU=<onoff>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read current setting  
AT+CTZU?  
• +CTZU: <onoff>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CTZU=?  
• +CTZU: (list of  
supported <onoff>s)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Enables and disables the automatic time zone update via NITZ. If  
setting fails in an ME error, +CME ERROR <err> is returned.  
<onoff>  
Description  
0
The automatic time zone update is disabled (off). Default  
value  
1
The automatic time zone update is enabled (on)  
90  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4. Audio  
AT*E2EAMS and AT*E2APR are new commands that replace the  
funtionality offered by the *EALR, *EAMS, *EARS and *ELAM  
commands. Use the new commands in new applications. The old  
commands are included for compatibility.  
4.1 AT*E2EAMS Ericsson M2M Audio Profile Modification  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request  
operation  
with audio  
profile  
AT*E2EAMS= <op>[,<TxPGA>, • ERROR  
<RxPGA>,<SideToneGain>,  
<AuxInGain>,<MicInGain>,  
<TxAGC>,<Volume>,  
• OK  
<MaxVolume>,<MicPath>,  
<SpkPath>,<TxPCM>,  
<RxPCM>,<HFAlgorithm>,  
<LocalAudio>,<TxGainLow>,  
<MicVolt2V>,<SideTone>,  
<NoiseRed>,<EchoCancel>,  
<AnalogRing>,][,<val>]]  
Display set  
profile  
AT*E2EAMS?  
• *E2EAMS: <TxPGA>,  
<RxPGA>,  
<SideToneGain>,  
<AuxInGain>,  
<MicInGain>,  
<TxAGC>,<Volume>,  
<MaxVolume>,  
<MicPath>,<SpkPath>,  
<TxPCM>,<RxPCM>,  
<HFAlgorithm>,  
<LocalAudio>,  
<TxGainLow>,  
<MicVolt2V>,  
<SideTone>,<NoiseRed>,  
<EchoCancel>,  
<AnalogRing>  
OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command  
is supported  
AT*E2EAMS=?  
• *E2EAMS:  
(list of supported <op>s)  
• ERROR  
This command allows the modification and configuration of the current  
audio profile. An audio profile is a set of data which uniquely defines  
the way in which the audio paths, gains, DSP algorithms and switch  
setting are configured. There are several audio profiles available in  
non-volatile storage, and the current profile can be modified by use of  
the AT*E2APR command.  
The AT*E2EAMS command allows the user to:  
91  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
• configure the whole profile, specifying each audio parameter in a  
comma separated list;  
• set a single parameter, given by its parameter number;  
• save the current profile to non-volatile memory under the current  
profile number (see AT*E2APR).  
The current audio settings can also be displayed by running the read  
command AT*E2EAMS?  
Default audio settings are given in AT*E2APR.  
Abortability:  
This command may not be aborted.  
Refer to the diagram below to understand which parts of the audio  
circuit are affected by the various parameters.  
CODEC  
DSP  
Speech  
decoder  
F/R  
ATMS  
PCMOUT  
PCMULD  
AuxInGain  
MicInGain  
TxPGA  
TxGainLow  
TxPCM  
MicPath  
switches  
MICP  
MICN  
SideTone  
Gain  
Handsfree  
EchoCancel  
NoiseRed  
SideTone  
switch  
Aux Amp  
Ear Amp  
SpkPath  
switches  
PCMIN  
PCMDLD  
Encoder  
F/R  
RxPGA  
Volume  
RxPCM  
BEARP  
BEARN  
Figure 4.1 Audio diagram of the CODEC  
92  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. AUDIO  
<op>  
Description  
0
Configure current profile (<pr1> to <pr21>)  
Set <TxPGA>  
1
2
Set <RxPGA>  
3
Set <SideToneGain>  
Set <AuxInGain>  
Set <MicInGain>  
Set <TxAGC>  
4
5
6
7
Set <Volume>  
8
Set <MaxVolume>  
Set <MicPath>  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
255  
Set <SpkPath>  
Set <TxPCM>  
Set <RxPCM>  
Set <HFAlgorithm>  
Set <LocalAudio>  
Set <TxGainLow>  
Set <MicVolt2V>  
Set <SideTone>  
Set <NoiseRed>  
Set <EchoCancel>  
Set <AnalogRing>  
Save current profile to non-volatile storage at current  
profile number  
<TxPGA>,  
<RxPGA>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
-5dB PGA gain  
-2.5dB PGA gain  
0dB PGA gain  
2.5dB PGA gain  
93  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<TxPGA>,  
<RxPGA>  
Description  
5dB PGA gain  
4
5
6
7
7.5dB PGA gain  
–7.5dB PGA gain  
–10dB PGA gain  
<SideToneGain> Description  
0
1
2
3
4
5
10dB  
13dB  
16dB  
19dB  
22dB  
25dB  
<AuxInputGain>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
MUTE  
13dB  
34dB  
46dB  
<MicInputGain>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
MUTE  
13dB  
25dB  
34dB  
46dB  
<TxAGCGain>  
Description  
0
1
2
0dB  
3dB  
6dB  
94  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. AUDIO  
<Volume>,  
Description  
<MaxVolume>  
0
MUTE  
1-9  
Volume levels 1-9  
<MicPath>,  
<SpkPath>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
OFF  
MUTE  
Internal (using microphone/speaker)  
External (using ATMS/AFMS)  
<TxPCM>,  
<RxPCM>  
Description  
0
1
13bit PCM  
16bit PCM  
<HFAlgorithm>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
No handsfree  
Advanced handsfree  
Switching handsfree  
No handsfree handheld  
No handsfree external  
<LocalAudio>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
Local audio mode off  
Local audio microphone/no speaker  
Local audio no microphone/speaker  
Local audio microphone/speaker  
<TxGainLow>  
Description  
0
1
Tx gain normal  
Tx gain –7dB  
95  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<MicVolt2V>  
Description  
0
1
Microphone voltage at 2.5V  
Microphone voltage at 2V  
<SideTone>,  
Description  
<NoiseRed>,  
<EchoCancel>,  
<AnalogRing>  
0
1
OFF  
ON  
Examples  
AT*E2EAMS=?  
*E2EAMS=(0-21,255)  
OK  
Current default profile is 0:  
AT*E2EAMS?  
*E2EAMS: 2,2,3,2,3,2,5,9,3,3,0,1,0,0,0,1,1,1,1,1,1  
OK  
Sets current profile with these settings:  
AT*E2EAMS=0,2,1,2,0,0,2,5,9,2,2,0,1,0,0,0,1,1,0,0,1,1  
OK  
Sets TxPGA gain to 0dB:  
AT*E2EAMS=1,2  
OK  
Turns analog ringing off:  
AT*E2EAMS=20,0  
OK  
Save current profile to currently loaded profile in non-volatile memory:  
AT*E2EAMS=255  
OK  
96  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. AUDIO  
4.2 AT*E2APR  
M2M Audio Profile Manipulation  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request operation  
with audio profile  
AT*E2APR=  
<op>[,<prnum1>  
[,<prnum2>]]  
• ERROR  
• OK  
• *E2APR: <TxPGA>,<RxPGA>,  
<SideToneGain>,<AuxInGain>,  
<MicInGain>,<TxAGC>,  
<Volume>,<MaxVolume>,  
<MicPath>,<SpkPath>,  
<TxPCM>,<RxPCM>,  
<HFAlgorithm>,<LocalAudio>,  
<TxGainLow>,<MicVolt2V>,  
<SideTone>,<NoiseRed>,  
<EchoCancel>,<AnalogRing>  
• OK  
Display currently  
set profile  
AT*E2APR?  
•
•
*E2APR: current <prnum>  
ERROR  
Shows if the  
command is  
supported  
AT*E2APR=?  
• *E2APR: (list of supported  
<op>s), (list of supported  
<prnum1>s), (list of supported  
<prnum2>s)  
• ERROR  
This command allows the maniuplation and storage of the audio  
“profiles” stored in the MS. The requirement for the 2nd and 3rd  
parameters depend on the operation being carried out.  
Using the command you can:  
• Set one of the three audio profiles 0, 1 or 2 as the current profile.  
This will load the profile's settings from NVM and implement them.  
• Read one of the audio profiles. The current settings for the profile  
number defined will be displayed.  
• Copy all parameters from one profile into another.  
• Reset any of the profiles. This will reinstate the factory defaults for  
the profile:  
- 0 is the handset profile,  
- 1 is the portable handsfree profile,  
- 2 is the car kit profile.  
• Set a profile as the default profile on next power up.  
<op>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
Set profile <prnum1> to set as current  
Copy profile <prnum1> to <prnum2>  
Read profile <prnum1> settings  
Reset profile <prnum1> to factory default  
Set default profile as <prnum1>. Will store this as defautl  
profile in NVM, and use it as default from next power on  
97  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<prnum1>,  
Description  
<prnum2>  
0
1
2
Profile 0 (Factory profile set for handset). Default value  
Profile 1 (Factory profile set for portable handsfree)  
Profile 2 (Factory profile set for car kit)  
Examples  
AT*E2APR=?  
*E2APR= (0-4),(0-2),(0-2)  
OK  
Current default profile is profile 0:  
AT*E2APR?  
*E2APR: 0  
OK  
Set audio profile now used to profile 1:  
AT*E2APR=0,1  
OK  
Audio profile 1 settings:  
AT*E2APR=1,1  
*E2APR: 0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0  
OK  
Copy audio profile 1 to audio profile 2:  
AT*E2APR=2,1,2  
OK  
Reset audio profile 1 with factory default - this also resets the current  
audio paths to the new profile as 1 is currently used:  
AT*E2APR=3,1  
OK  
Sets profile number 1 as the default when modem is powered on:  
AT*E2APR=4,1  
OK  
98  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. AUDIO  
4.3 AT*EALR  
Ericsson Audio Line Request  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request the audio lines  
(ATMS,AFMS)  
AT*EALR=<mode>  
[,<activation>  
[,<aud_status>]]  
• *EALR: <mode>,  
<activation>,<resp>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT*EALR?  
*EALR:  
<mode>,<activation>,  
<resp>  
Show list of supported  
parameters  
AT*EALR=?  
*EALR:(list of supported  
<mode>s,  
<activation>s and  
<aud_status>s  
parameters)  
Included for compatibility. No functionality.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
No request for ATMS or AFMS  
Request ATMS and not AFMS  
Request AFMS and not ATMS  
Request ATMS and AFMS  
<activation>  
Description  
0
Not direct activated audio accessory (e.g. cordless  
portable hands free)  
1
Direct activated audio accessory (e.g. vehicle hands  
free)  
<aud_status>  
Description  
0
1
No change of the audio status  
Audio hand over. Accessory hands over control of both  
the audio lines and the call to the phone  
2
Audio demand. Accessory demands control of both the  
audio lines and the call  
<resp>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
Disable ATMS and AFMS  
Enable ATMS and disable AFMS  
Disable ATMS and enable AFMS  
Enable ATMS and AFMS  
99  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
4.4 AT*EAMS  
Ericsson Audio Mode Selection  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Sets the audio  
mode for the  
application  
AT*EAMS=<internal_voice_al  
g>[,<noise_reduction>  
[,<side tone>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
[,<short_echo_canceling>  
[,<ATMS_gain>  
[,<class>  
[,<ATMS_sensitivity_deviation  
_from_class>  
[,<AFMS_sensitivity_deviation  
_from_class>]]]]]]]  
Show the  
current audio  
mode setting  
AT*EAMS?  
*EAMS:<internal_voice_alg  
>, <noise_reduction>,  
<side_tone>,  
<short_echo_canceling>,  
<AFMS_gain>,<class>,<AT  
MS_sensitivity_deviation_fr  
om_class>,<AFMS_sensitivi  
ty_deviation_from_class>  
Show list of  
supported  
services  
AT*EAMS=?  
*EAMS: (list of supported  
<internal_voice_alg >s,  
<noise_reduction>s,  
<side_tone>s,  
<short_echo_canceling>s,  
<AFMS_gain>s>,  
<class>s,  
<ATMS_sensitivity_deviatio  
n_from_class>s,  
<AFMS_sensitivity_deviatio  
n_from_class>s)  
Included for compatibility. No functionality.  
<internal_voice_alg>  
Description  
0
1
2
None  
Semi Duplex  
Full Duplex  
(Note! the internal hands free algorithm in the  
MS contains echo cancelling)  
<noise_reduction>  
Description  
0
1
Off  
On  
<side_tone>  
Description  
0
1
Off  
On  
100  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4. AUDIO  
<short_echo_canceling>  
Description  
0
1
Off  
On  
<ATMS_gain>  
Description  
0
Normal (0dB) (internal voice processing)  
<Class>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
None  
Low end, class reference Hector  
Mid End, class reference Scott  
High End, class reference Hasse  
<ATMS_sensitivity_deviation_from_class>, Description  
<AFMS_sensitivity_deviation_from_class>  
0
1
2
3
4
0dB  
2,5dB  
–2,5dB  
5,0dB  
–5,0dB  
4.5 AT*EARS  
Ericsson Audio Ring Signal  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request analogue ring  
signal in the loudspeaker  
AT*EARS=<mode>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current mode  
setting  
AT*EARS?  
*EARS: <mode>  
Show list of supported  
modes  
AT*EARS=?  
*EARS: (list of  
supported <mode>s)  
Included for compatibility. No functionality.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
1
Disable analogue ring signal  
Enable analogue ring signal  
101  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
4.6 AT*ELAM  
Ericsson Local Audio Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set local audio mode  
AT*ELAM=<mic>  
[,<loudspeaker>]  
• *ELAM: <mic>,  
<loudspeaker>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
service setting  
AT*ELAM?  
*ELAM:  
<mic>,<loudspeaker>  
Show list of supported  
parameters  
AT*ELAM=?  
*ELAM: (list of  
supported <mic>s and  
<loudspeaker>s  
parameters)  
Included for compatibility. No functionality.  
<mic>  
Description  
0
1
Off  
Microphone analogue  
<loudspeaker>  
Description  
0
1
Off  
Loudspeaker analogue  
4.7 AT*EMIC  
Ericsson Microphone Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Enables/disables the  
phone microphone  
AT*EMIC=<mode>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the command is  
supported, show  
AT*EMIC=?  
AT*EMIC?  
• *EMIC: (list of  
supported  
supported values  
<mode>s)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the current  
settings  
• *EMIC: <mode>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Included for compatibility. No functionality.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
1
Microphone is disabled (off)  
Microphone is enabled (on)  
102  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4. AUDIO  
4.8 AT*EMIR  
Ericsson Music Mute Indication Request  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request for mute  
indications  
AT*EMIR=<mode>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show supported  
message types along  
with the current service  
setting  
AT*EMIR?  
*EMIR: <mode>,<resp>  
Show list of supported  
services  
AT*EMIR=?  
*EMIR: (list of supported  
<mode>s)  
Included for compatibility. No functionality.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
Off, music mute indication result codes will not be sent to  
the accessory  
1
On, music mute indication result codes will be sent to the  
accessory  
<resp>  
Description  
0
1
Music mute inactive  
Music mute active  
4.9 AT*EXVC  
Ericsson SET External Volume Control  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Sets the maximum  
volume level on the  
audio lines  
AT*EXVC=<external  
volume>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the command is  
supported and show  
the possible report  
settings  
AT*EXVC=?  
AT*EXVC?  
• *EXVC: (list of  
supported <external  
volume>s)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the current  
setting  
• *EXVC: <external  
volume>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Used to set or query whether an external accessory such as the vehicle  
handsfree controls the audio volume.  
By default, the <external volume> is turned off, i.e. the volume over  
AFMS is controlled by the phone MMI.  
103  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
The set command is effective only as long as the phone senses that it is  
connected to an external accessory that has issued the command. Once  
the phone and the accessory are disconnected the <external volume>  
setting returns to default.  
<external volume>  
Description  
0
1
The phone MMI controls audio volume over AFMS  
Audio volume over AFMS is output at maximum level  
that is no clipping occurs. An external accessory  
such as a vehicle kit controls the actual volume level  
heard by the user  
104  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Data - CSD/HSCSD  
Note!  
Since the modem does not support V42bis compression the following  
commands have not been implemented:  
• AT+DS  
• AT+DR  
5.1 AT+CBST  
Select Bearer Service Type  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Select bearer service  
type  
AT+CBST=[<speed>,  
[<name>,[<ce>]]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the command  
AT+CBST?  
• +CBST:  
<speed>,<name>,  
<ce>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the command is  
supported  
AT+CBST=?  
• +CBST: (list of supported  
<speed>s,list of  
supported <name>s, list  
of supported <ce>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Selects the bearer service <name> with data rate <speed>, and the  
connection element <ce> to be used when data calls are originated.  
Values may also be used during mobile terminated data call setup,  
especially in the case of single numbering scheme calls.  
Test command returns values supported by the TA as compound values.  
<speed>  
Description  
0
Auto selection of baud rate  
2400bps V.22bis  
4
6
4800bps V.32  
7
9600bps V.32  
12  
15  
68  
70  
9600bps V.34  
19200bps V.34  
2400bps V.110 (ISDN)  
4800bps V.110 (ISDN)  
105  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<speed>  
Description  
71  
75  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
9600bps V.110 (ISDN)  
14400bps V.110 (ISDN)  
19200bps V.110 (ISDN)  
28800bps V.110 (ISDN)  
38400bps V.110 (ISDN)  
48000bps V.110 (ISDN)  
56000bps V.110 (ISDN)  
<name>  
Description  
0
Asynchronous connection (UDI or 3.1kHz modem)  
<ce>  
Description  
1
Non transparent  
106  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. DATA - CSD/HSCSD  
5.2 AT+CRLP  
Radio Link Protocol  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set radio link  
protocol  
AT+CRLP=[<iws>  
[,<mws>[,<T1>  
[,<N2>[,<ver>  
[, <T4>]]]]]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the  
command  
AT+CRLP?  
• +CRLP:  
<iws>,<mws>,<T1>,<N2>[,<ver1>  
[,<T4>]][<CR><LF>  
• +CRLP:  
<iws>,<mws>,<T1>,<N2>[,<ver2>  
[,<T4>]][...]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CRLP=?  
• +CRLP: (list of supported <iws>s),  
(list of supported <mws>s),  
(list of supported <T1>s),  
(list of supported<N2>s)[,<ver1>  
[,(list of supported <T4>s)]]  
[<CR><LF>+CRLP: (list of  
supported <iws>s), (list of  
supported <mws>s), (list of  
supported <T1>s), (list of  
supported <N2>s)[,<ver2>[,(list of  
supported <T4>s)]][...]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Radio link protocol (RLP) parameters used when non-transparent data  
calls are originated may be altered with this command. Available  
command subparameters depend on the RLP versions implemented by  
the device (e.g. <ver> may not be available if device supports only  
versions 0 and 1).  
Read command returns current settings for each supported RLP version  
<verx>. Only RLP parameters applicable to the corresponding <verx>  
are returned.  
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound  
value. If ME/TA supports several RLP versions <verx>, the RLP  
parameter value ranges for each <verx> are returned in a separate line.  
<iws>  
Description  
120  
0 - 496  
IWF to MS window size  
<mws>  
Description  
120  
0 - 496  
MS to IWF window size  
107  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<T1>  
Description  
48  
38 - 100  
Acknowledgment timer T1 (*10ms)  
<N2>  
Description  
6
Re-transmission attempts N2  
0 - 255  
<T4>  
Description  
5
Re-sequencing period T4 (*10ms)  
3 - 255  
<ver>  
Description  
Integer  
RLP version. When version indication is not present,  
<ver>=0 is assumed  
108  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Data - GPRS  
6.1 AT+CGACT PDP Context Activate or Deactivate  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Activate or deactivate  
the specified PDP  
context(s)  
+CGACT=[<state>  
[,<cid>[,<cid>[,…]]]]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the command  
+CGACT?  
• +CGACT: <cid>,  
<state>[<CR><LF>  
+CGACT: <cid>,  
<state>[...]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the command is  
supported  
+CGACT=?  
• +CGACT: (list of  
supported <state>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Used to activate or deactivate the specified PDP context(s).  
After the command has completed, the MS remains in V.250 command  
state. If the MS is already in the requested state, the command is ignored  
and OK is returned. If the requested state cannot be achieved, ERROR  
or +CME: ERROR is returned. If the MS is not attached to the GPRS  
service when the activation form of the command is executed, the MS  
first performs a GPRS attach and then attempts to activate the specific  
contexts.  
If no <cid>s are specified the activation form of the command activates  
all defined contexts.  
If no <cid>s are specified the deactivation form of the command  
deactivates all active contexts.  
<state>  
Description  
0
1
PDP context activation deactivated  
PDP context activation activated  
<cid>  
Description  
Integer type  
A numeric parameter which specifies a specific PDP  
context definition  
109  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
6.2 AT+CGATT GPRS Attach or Detach  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Attach or detach MS  
to the GPRS/packet  
domain/packet  
+CGATT=[<state>]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
domain service  
Read the command  
+CGATT?  
• +CGATT: <state>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the command is  
supported  
+CGATT=?  
• +CGATT: (list of  
supported <state>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Used to attach the MS to, or detach the MS from, the GPRS/packet  
domain service. After the command has completed, the MS remains in  
V.250 command state. If the MS is already in the requested state, the  
command is ignored and the OK response is returned. If the requested  
state cannot be achieved, an ERROR or +CME ERROR response is  
returned. Extended error responses (enabled by the +CMEE command)  
are listed under “+CME ERROR (Mobile Equipment Error Code)”,  
page 57.  
Any active PDP contexts will be automatically deactivated when the  
attachment state changes to detached.  
Note!  
This command has the characteristics of both the V.250 action and  
parameter commands. Hence it has the read form in addition to the  
execution/set and test forms.  
<state>  
Description  
0
1
Detached  
Attached  
110  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6. DATA - GPRS  
6.3 AT+CGDATA Enter Data State  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Establish GPRS/packet  
domain connection  
+CGDATA=[<L2p>,[cid  
[,cid>[,…]]]]  
• CONNECT  
• ERROR  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the command is  
supported  
+CGDATA=?  
• +CGDATA: (list of  
supported <L2P>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Causes the MS to perform whatever actions are necessary to establish  
communication between the TE and the network using one or more  
GPRS/packet domain PDP types. This may include performing a  
GPRS/packet domain attach and one or more PDP context activations.  
<L2P>  
Description  
PPP  
Point-to-point protocol for a PDP such as IP  
111  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
6.4 AT+CGDCONT Define PDP Context  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Select PDP  
context  
parameters  
+CGDCONT=[<cid>  
[,<PDP_type> [,<APN>  
[,<PDP_addr>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
[,<d_comp>  
[,<h_comp> [,<pd1>  
[,…[,pdN]]]]]]]]]  
Read the  
command  
+CGDCONT?  
• +CGDCONT: <cid>,  
<PDP_type>,<APN>,  
<PDP_addr>,<d_comp>,  
<h_comp>[,<pd1>[,…[,pdN]]]  
[<CR><LF>+CGDCONT:  
<cid>, <PDP_type>,<APN>,  
<PDP_addr>,<d_comp>,  
<h_comp>[,<pd1>[,…[,pdN]]]  
[...]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the  
command is  
supported  
+CGDCONT=?  
• +CGDCONT: (range of  
supported <cid>s),  
<PDP_type>,,,(list of  
supported <d_comp>s),  
(list of supported <h_comp>s)  
[,(list of supported <pd1>s)  
[,…[,(list of supported  
<pdN>s)]]]  
[<CR><LF>+CGDCONT:  
(range of supported <cid>s),  
<PDP_type>,,,(list of  
supported <d_comp>s),  
(list of supported <h_comp>s)  
[,(list of supported  
<pd1>s)[,…[,(list of supported  
<pdN>s)]]] [...]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Specifies PDP context parameter values for a PDP context identified by  
the (local) context identification parameter, <cid>.  
<cid>  
Description  
Integer type  
(PDP Context Identifier) a numeric parameter which  
specifies a particular PDP context definition. The  
parameter is local to the TE-MS interface and is used in  
other PDP context-related commands. The range of  
permitted values (minimum value = 1) is returned by the  
test form of the command  
1-10  
Supported values. Ericsson specific  
<PDP_type>  
Description  
IP  
Internet Protocol (IETF STD 5)  
112  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6. DATA - GPRS  
<APN>  
Description  
String type  
(Access Point Name) a string parameter which is a logical  
name that is used to select the GGSN or the external  
packet data network. If the value is null or omitted, then  
the subscription value will be requested  
<PDP_address>  
Description  
String type  
A string parameter that identifies the MS in the  
address space applicable to the PDP. If the value is  
null or omitted, then a value may be provided by  
the TE during the PDP startup procedure or, failing  
that, a dynamic address will be requested  
<d_comp>  
Description  
0
PDP data compression OFF  
PDP data compression ON  
Reserved  
1
2..255  
<h_comp>  
Description  
0
PDP header compression OFF  
PDP header compression ON  
Reserved  
1
2..255  
<pdN>  
Description  
String type  
Zero to N string parameters whose meanings are specific  
to the <PDP_type>  
113  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
6.5 AT+CGEREP GPRS Event Reporting  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set command  
+CGEREP=[<mode>  
[,<bfr>]]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the command  
+CGEREP?  
• +CGEREP:  
<mode>,<bfr>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the command is  
supported  
+CGEREP=?  
• +CGEREP: (list of  
supported  
<mode>s),(list of  
supported <bfr>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Enables or disables the sending of unsolicited result codes, +CGEV:  
XXX from MS to TE in the case of certain events occurring in the  
GPRS/packet domain MS or the network.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
Buffer unsolicited result codes in the MS. No codes are  
forwarded to the TE  
1
Discard unsolicited result codes when MS-TE link is  
reserved; otherwise forward them directly to the TE  
<bfr>  
Description  
0
MS buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this  
command is cleared when <mode> 1 or 2 is entered  
114  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6. DATA - GPRS  
6.6 AT+CGPADDR Show PDP Address  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Show PDP addresses  
for specified CIDs  
+CGPADDR=[<cid>  
[,<cid> [,…]]]  
• +CGPADDR:  
<cid>,<PDP_addr>  
[<CR><LF>+CGPAD  
DR:  
<cid>,<PDP_addr>  
[...]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the command is  
supported  
+CGPADDR=?  
• +CGPADDR: (list of  
defined <cid>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Returns a list of PDP addresses for the specified context identifiers. The  
test command returns a list of defined <cid>s.  
<cid>  
Description  
Integer type  
Parameter which specifies a particular PDP context  
definition (see +CGDCONT command). If no <cid> is  
specified, the addresses for all defined contexts are  
returned  
<PDP_address>  
Description  
String type  
A string that identifies the MS in the address space  
applicable to the PDP. The address may be static or  
dynamic. For a static address, it will be the one set by  
the +CGDCONT command when the context was  
defined. For a dynamic address it will be the one  
assigned during the last PDP context activation that  
used the context definition referred to by <cid>.  
<PDP_address> is omitted if none is available  
115  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
6.7 AT+CGQMIN Quality of Service Profile (Minimum Acceptable)  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set minimum  
acceptable  
profile  
+CGQMIN=[<cid>  
[,<precedence>  
[,<delay> [,<reliability>  
[,<peak>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
[,<mean>]]]]]]  
Read the  
command  
+CGQMIN?  
• +CGQMIN: <cid>,  
<precedence>, <delay>,  
<reliability>, <peak>,  
<mean>[<CR><LF>+CGQMIN:  
<cid>, <precedence>,  
<delay>, <reliability>, <peak>,  
<mean>[…]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the  
command is  
supported  
+CGQMIN=?  
• +CGQMIN: <PDP_type>, (list of  
supported <precedence>s),  
(list of supported <delay>s),  
(list of supported <reliability>s)  
, (list of supported <peak>s),  
(list of supported  
<mean>s)[<CR><LF>+CGQMI  
N: <PDP_type>, (list of  
supported <precedence>s),  
(list of supported <delay>s),  
(list of supported <reliability>s)  
, (list of supported <peak>s),  
(list of supported  
<mean>s)[…]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Allows the TE to specify a minimum acceptable profile which is  
checked by the MS against the negotiated profile returned in the  
Activate PDP Context Accept message.  
The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the  
(local) context identification parameter, <cid>. Since this is the same  
parameter that is used in the +CGDCONT command, the +CGQMIN  
command is effectively an extension to the +CGDCONT command.  
The QoS profile consists of a number of parameters, each of which may  
be set to a separate value.  
A special form of the set command, +CGQMIN=<cid> causes the  
minimum acceptable profile for context number <cid> to become  
undefined. In this case no check is made against the negotiated profile.  
<cid>  
Description  
Integer type  
Parameter which specifies a particular PDP context  
definition  
116  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6. DATA - GPRS  
<precedence>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
Subscribed (from network) value used  
High priority  
Normal priority  
Low priority  
<delay>  
Description  
0
Subscribed (from network) value used  
Delay class  
1-4  
<reliability>  
Description  
0
Subscribed (from network) value used  
Reliability class  
1-5  
<peak>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Subscribed (from network) value used  
Up to 1000 (8kbits/s)  
Up to 2000 (16kbits/s)  
Up to 4000 (32kbits/s)  
Up to 8000 (64kbits/s)  
Up to 16000 (128kbits/s)  
Up to 32000 (256kbits/s)  
Up to 64000 (512kbits/s)  
Up to 128000 (1024kbits/s)  
Up to 256000 (2048kbits/s)  
<mean>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Subscribed (from network) value used  
Best effort  
100 (~0.22bits/s)  
200 (~0.44bits/s)  
500 (~1.11bits/s)  
1000 (~2.2bits/s)  
2000 (~4.4bits/s)  
5000 (~11.1bits/s)  
117  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<mean>  
Description  
8
10000 (~22bits/s)  
9
20000 (~44bits/s)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
31  
50000 (~111bits/s)  
100000 (~0.22kbits/s)  
200000 (~0.44kbits/s)  
500000 (~1.11kbits/s)  
1000000 (~2.2kbits/s)  
2000000 (~4.4kbits/s)  
5000000 (~11.1kbits/s)  
10000000 (~22kbits/s)  
20000000 (~44kbits/s)  
50000000 (~111kbits/s)  
6.8 AT+CGQREQ Quality of Service Profile (Requested)  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set quality  
of service  
profile  
+CGQREQ=[<cid>  
[,<precedence>  
[,<delay>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
[,<reliability>  
[,<peak>  
[,<mean>]]]]]]  
Read the  
command  
+CGQREQ?  
• +CGQREQ: <cid>, <precedence>,  
<delay>, <reliability>, <peak>,  
<mean>[<CR><LF>+CGQREQ:  
<cid>, <precedence>, <delay>,  
<reliability>, <peak>, <mean>[…]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the  
command  
is supported  
+CGQREQ=?  
• +CGQREQ: <PDP_type>,  
(list of supported <precedence>s),  
(list of supported <delay>s),  
(list of supported <reliability>s),  
(list of supported <peak>s),  
(list of supported <mean>s)  
[<CR><LF>+CGQREQ: <PDP_type>,  
(list of supported <precedence>s),  
(list of supported <delay>s),  
(list of supported <reliability>s),  
(list of supported <peak>s),  
(list of supported <mean>s)[…]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Allows the TE to specify a quality of service profile that is used when  
the MS sends an activate PDP context request message to the network.  
118  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6. DATA - GPRS  
The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the  
(local) context identification parameter, <cid>. Since this is the same  
parameter that is used in the +CGDCONT command, the +CGQREQ  
command is effectively an extension to the +CGDCONT command.  
The QoS profile consists of a number of parameters, each of which may  
be set to a separate value.  
A special form of the set command, +CGQREQ= <cid> causes the  
requested profile for context number <cid> to become undefined.  
<cid>  
Description  
Integer type  
Parameter which specifies a particular PDP context  
definition  
<precedence>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
Subscribed (from network) value used  
High priority  
Normal priority  
Low priority  
<delay>  
Description  
0
Subscribed (from network) value used  
Delay class  
1-4  
<reliability>  
Description  
0
Subscribed (from network) value used  
Reliability class  
1-5  
<peak>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Subscribed (from network) value used  
Up to 1000 (8kbits/s)  
Up to 2000 (16kbits/s)  
Up to 4000 (32kbits/s)  
Up to 8000 (64kbits/s)  
Up to 16000 (128kbits/s)  
Up to 32000 (256kbits/s)  
Up to 64000 (512kbits/s)  
Up to 128000 (1024kbits/s)  
Up to 256000 (2048kbits/s)  
119  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<mean>  
Description  
0
Subscribed (from network) value used  
1
Best effort  
2
100 (~0.22bits/s)  
3
200 (~0.44bits/s)  
4
500 (~1.11bits/s)  
5
1000 (~2.2bits/s)  
6
2000 (~4.4bits/s)  
7
5000 (~11.1bits/s)  
10000 (~22bits/s)  
20000 (~44bits/s)  
50000 (~111bits/s)  
100000 (~0.22kbits/s)  
200000 (~0.44kbits/s)  
500000 (~1.11kbits/s)  
1000000 (~2.2kbits/s)  
2000000 (~4.4kbits/s)  
5000000 (~11.1kbits/s)  
10000000 (~22kbits/s)  
20000000 (~44kbits/s)  
50000000 (~111kbits/s)  
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
31  
120  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. DATA - GPRS  
6.9 AT+CGREG GPRS Network Registration Status  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set command  
AT+CGREG=[<n>]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the current  
settings  
AT+CGREG?  
• +CGREG:  
<n>,<stat>[,<lac>,  
<ci>]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the command is  
supported  
AT+CGREG=?  
• +CGREG: (list of  
supported <n>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code +CGREG: <stat>  
when <n>=1 and there is a change in the GPRS/packet domain network  
registration status of the MS, or code +CGREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]  
when <n>=2 and there is a change of the network cell.  
Note!  
If the GPRS/Packet Domain MS also supports circuit mode services, the  
+CGREG command and +CGREG: result code apply to the registration  
status and location information for those services.  
<n>  
Description  
0
1
2
Disable network registration unsolicited result code  
Enable network registration unsolicited result code  
Enable network registration and location information  
unsolicited result code  
<stat>  
Description  
0
Not registered, MS is not searching for a new operator to  
register with  
1
2
Registered, home network  
Not registered, but MS is searching for a new operator to  
register with  
3
4
5
Registration denied  
Unknown  
Registered, roaming  
<lac>  
Description  
String type  
Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format  
121  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<ci>  
String type  
Description  
Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format  
6.10 AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set service or service  
preference  
+CGSMS=[<service>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the command  
+CGSMS?  
• +CGSMS: <service>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the command is  
supported  
+CGSMS=?  
• +CGSMS: (list of  
available  
<service>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Used to specify the service or service preference that the MS will use to  
send MO SMS messages. The read command returns the currently  
selected service or service preference.  
<services>  
Description  
2
GPRS/packet domain preferred (use circuit switched if  
GPRS/packet domain not available)  
3
Circuit switched preferred (use GPRS/packet domain if  
circuit switched not available)  
122  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7. Data - HSCSD  
7.1 AT+CHSC  
HSCSD Current Call Parameters  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Show current HSCSD  
call parameters  
AT+CHSC  
• +CHSC:<rx>,<tx>,<aiur>,<coding>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if command is  
supported  
AT+CHSC=?  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Returns information about the current HSCSD call parameters, i.e. the  
current number of receive and transmit timeslots, air interface user rate  
and channel coding.  
<rx>  
Description  
0
1
2
No HSCSD call is active. See also note below  
The number of receive timeslots currently in use is 1  
The number of receive timeslots currently in use is 2  
<tx>  
Description  
0
1
No HSCSD call is active. See also note below  
The number of transmit timeslots currently in use is 1  
<aiur>  
Description  
0
1
3
No HSCSD call is active. See also note below.  
Current air interface user rate is 9.6kbits/s  
Current air interface user rate is 19.2kbits/s  
<coding>  
Description  
0
4
8
No HSCSD call is active. See also note  
Current channel coding is 9.6kbits/s (TCH/F9.6)  
Current channel coding is 14.4kbits/s (TCH/F14.4)  
123  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
7.2 AT+CHSD  
HSCSD Device Parameters  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Show HSCSD features  
supported by the ME/  
TA  
AT+CHSD  
• +CHSD:  
<mclass>,<maxRx>,  
<maxTx>,<sum>,<codings>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if command is  
supported  
AT+CHSD=?  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Shows information about HSCSD features supported by the ME/TA.  
<mclass>  
Description  
2
Multislot class is 2  
<maxRx>  
Description  
2
Maximum number of receive timeslots that ME can use is 2  
<maxTx>  
Description  
1
Maximum number of transmit timeslots that ME can use is 1  
<sum>  
Description  
3
Total number of receive and transmit timeslots that ME  
can use at the same time is 3 (i.e. 2+1). The following  
applies in a HSCSD call: 2 (receive slots) + (transmit slots)  
<sum>  
<codings>  
Description  
4
Indicates that the accepted channel coding for the next  
established non-transparent HSCSD call is 9.6kbits/s only  
124  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7. DATA - HSCSD  
7.3 AT+CHSN  
HSCSD Non Transparent Call Configuration  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set HSCSD  
AT+CHSN=[<wAiur>  
[,<wRx>[,<topRx>  
[,<codings>]]]]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
configuration. This  
command is also used  
during a call if new  
<wAiur> and/or <wRx>  
are/is desired  
Show current non-  
transparent HSCSD  
setting  
AT+CHSN?  
• +CHSN: <wAiur>,  
<wRx>, <topRx>,  
<codings>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if command is  
supported and show  
parameter ranges  
AT+CHSN=?  
• +CHSN: (list of  
supported <wAiur>s),  
(list of supported  
<wRx>s), (list of  
supported <topRx>s),  
(list of supported  
<codings>s)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Controls parameters for non-transparent HSCSD calls. Changing  
<topRx> or <codings> during a call does not affect the current call.  
Changing <wAiur> or <wRx> affects the current call only if <topRx>  
was non-zero when the call was established. When using the command  
in this way it comes in the “action” command category. This is what is  
referred to as user initiated up- and down-grading in GSM 02.34 and  
GSM 03.34.  
Note!  
Recommended value for parameter <speed> in AT+CBST is 0.  
<wAiur>  
Description  
0
TA/ME shall calculate a proper number of receive  
timeslots from currently selected fixed network user rate  
(<speed> parameter from +CBST command, and  
<codings>, and <wRx> (or <maxRx> from +CHSD  
command if <wRx>=0)  
1
2
3
4
Wanted air interface user rate is 9.6kbit/s  
Wanted air interface user rate is 14.4kbit/s  
Wanted air interface user rate is 19.2kbit/s  
Wanted air interface user rate is 28.8kbit/s  
125  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<wRx>  
Description  
0
TA/ME shall calculate a proper number of receive  
timeslots from currently selected <wAiur> and <codings>  
See note below  
1
2
Wanted number of receive timeslots is 1  
Wanted number of receive timeslots is 2  
<topRx>  
Description  
0
Indicates that the user is not going to change <wAiur>  
and /or <wRx> during the next call  
1
2
Top value for <wRx> that user is going to request during  
the next established non-transparent HSCSD call is 1  
Top value for <wRx> that user is going to request during  
the next established non-transparent HSCSD call is 2  
<codings>  
Description  
4
Indicates that the accepted channel coding for the next  
established non-transparent HSCSD call is 9.6kbit/s only  
7.4 AT+CHSR  
HSCSD Parameters Report  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set HSCSD parameters  
reporting on or off  
AT+CHSR=[<mode>]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show current setting  
AT+CHSR?  
• +CHSR: <mode>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if command is  
supported and show  
parameter range  
AT+CHSR=?  
• +CHSR: (list of  
supported  
<modes>s)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
With this command enabled, the intermediate result code +CHSR:  
<rx>,<tx>,<aiur>,<coding> is returned (from TA to TE) when an  
HSCSD call is being set up. The result code represents the current  
(negotiated or renegotiated) HSCSD parameters. If enabled, the  
intermediate result code is transmitted at the point of the call setup  
negotiation, where the ME/TA has determined what type of HSCSD  
connection will be used. Result code transmission is done after possible  
service (CR), error control (+ER), and/or compression (+DR) reporting,  
126  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7. DATA - HSCSD  
but before possible TE-TA rate (+ILRR) reporting and before the  
intermediate result code CONNECT is transmitted. The format of the  
intermediate result code is:  
+CHSR: <rx>,<tx>,<aiur>,<coding>  
For the value definitions, refer to “AT+CHSC HSCSD Current Call  
Parameters”, page 123. For instance, for a non-transparent HSCSD call,  
result code ‘CHSR: 2, 1, 4, 8’ means that the call has two timeslots  
downlink, one timeslot uplink, the air interface user rate is 28.8 kbits/s  
and the used channel coding is  
TCH/F14.4.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
1
Disable reporting  
Enable reporting  
Itermediate Result Codes:  
+CHSR: <rx>,<tx>,<aiur>,<coding>  
7.5 AT+CHSU  
HSCSD Automatic User Initiated Upgrading  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set HSCSD automatic  
user initiated  
upgrading on or off  
AT+CHSU=[<mode>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show current setting  
AT+CHSU?  
• +CHSU=<mode>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if command is  
supported and show  
parameter range  
AT+CHSU=?  
• +CHSU: (list of  
supported  
<modes>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Enables or disables the HSCSD automatic user-initiated upgrade.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
1
Disable use of UP bit for upgrading. Default value  
Enable use of UP bit for upgrading  
127  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
128  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Fax  
8.1 AT*E2FAX  
Ericsson M2M Fax Comm. Baud Rate Modification  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request change of fax  
comm. baud rate  
AT*E2FAX= <RcV>  
• ERROR  
• OK  
Displays currently set  
rate  
AT*E2FAX?  
• *E2FAX: <RcV>  
• ERROR  
Shows if the command  
is supported  
AT*E2FAX=?  
• *E2FAX: (list of  
supported <RcV>s)  
• ERROR  
This command allows the modification of the factory default RS232  
comm. setting between standard 9600 baud and 19200 baud. This is  
needed as the addition of fax capabilities, within the module, require  
communication between fax applications and the module to run at a  
higher baud rate than the fax transmission baud rate (In this case the  
fastest transmission rate is 9600 baud). Once this command has been  
performed, the user must then execute the AT&F command to reset the  
module with the new RS232 comm's baud rate.  
The AT*E2FAX command allows the user to:  
• “Configure” the RS232 Comm. speed default factory profile,  
specifying whether the speed should be 9600 baud (standard) or  
19200 baud for FAX application comm. This value will then be used  
once the AT&F command is next used.  
• “Read” what value this default factory profile has been set to.  
<RcV>  
Description  
0
1
Configure RS232 default setting to 9600 baud  
Configure RS232 default setting to 19200 baud  
Examples  
AT*E2FAX=?  
*E2FAX= (0-1)  
OK  
129  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
AT*E2FAX?  
*E2FAX: 0  
OK  
(Current default setting is 19200 baud)  
(Sets default RS232 setting to 9600 baud)  
AT*E2FAX=0  
OK  
8.2 Low Level Fax Commands  
The following table of low level fax commands are supported and used  
by the GM29 for fax operation.  
AT+FAA  
AT+FBADLIN  
AT+FBUG  
AT+FCQ  
AT+FDFFC  
AT+FDT  
AT+FBADMUL  
AT+FCIG  
AT+FCR  
AT+FBOR  
AT+FCLASS  
AT+FDCC  
AT+FDR  
AT+FDIS  
AT+FECM  
AT+FLID  
AT+FET  
AT+FK  
AT+FLNFC  
AT+FMFR?  
AT+FMM?  
AT+FPTS  
AT+FLPL  
AT+FMI?  
AT+FMR?  
AT+FRBC  
AT+FRH  
AT+FMDL?  
AT+FMINSP  
AT+FPHCTO  
AT+FREL  
AT+FREV?  
AT+FRS  
AT+FRM  
AT+FSPL  
AT+FTM  
AT+FTBC  
AT+FTS  
AT+FTH  
AT+FVRFC  
AT+FWDFC  
130  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
9. Identification  
9.1 AT  
Attention Command  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Checks the communication  
between the MS and  
application  
AT  
• OK  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
This command is used to determine the presence of an MS. If the MS  
supports AT commands, it returns an OK final result code.  
9.2 AT&F  
Set to Factory Defined Configuration  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Execute  
AT&F  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if supported and  
list available  
parameter range  
AT&F=?  
&F: (list of supported  
<profile>s)  
This command instructs the DCE to set all parameters to default values  
specified by the manufacturer, which may take in consideration  
hardware configuration and other manufacturer defined criteria.  
9.3 AT&W  
Store User Profile  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Stores the current user  
profile to non volatile  
memory  
AT&W=[<pr>] or  
AT&W[<pr>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT&W=?  
&W: (list of supported  
<pr>s)  
This command stores the current user profile in non-volatile memory.  
< pr>  
Description  
0
Stores current settings in User Profile 0  
131  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
9.4 AT*  
List all Supported AT Commands  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
List all implemented AT  
commands  
AT*  
<AT Command1>  
[<CR> <LF>  
<AT Command2>[…]]  
/
<AT Command1>  
[<CR> <LF>  
<AT Command2>[…]]  
Lists all the commands supported by the MS.  
9.5 AT+CGMI  
Read MS Manufacturer Identification  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request manufacturer  
identification  
AT+CGMI  
• <manufacturer>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CGMI=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Causes the MS to return one or more lines of information text.  
<manufacturer>  
Description  
Sony Ericsson  
This company’s name is displayed  
9.6 AT+CGMM Read MS Model Identification  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request the model  
identification  
AT+CGMM  
• <model type>  
<model name>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CGMM=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Causes the MS to return one or more lines of information text <model>,  
determined by the MS manufacturer. It is intended to permit the user of  
the ITAE/ETAE to identify the specific model of the MS to which it is  
connected. Typically the text will consist of a single line containing the  
name of the product, but manufacturers may choose to provide more  
information if desired.  
<model type>  
Description  
String type  
A unique ASCII character/digit string, always 10  
characters long. Spaces are used when the number of  
characters/digits is less than 10  
132  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
9. IDENTIFICATION  
<model name>  
Description  
String type  
Model name for the transceiver unit, for example, GM29  
9.7 AT+CGMR Read MS Revision Identification  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request MS revision  
identification string  
AT+CGMR  
• <revision>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CGMR=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command causes the MS to return a string containing information  
about the software version.  
<revision>  
Description  
String type  
An ASCII string containing date (year, month, day, hour,  
minute) plus KRC number.  
Example: 9710051610 CXC125112  
9.8 AT+CGSN  
Read MS Product Serial Number Identification  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request product serial  
number  
AT+CGSN  
• <sn>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CGSN=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command causes the MS to return the IMEI (International Mobile  
station Equipment Identity), which identifies the individual ME.  
<sn>  
Description  
String  
The IMEISV, which is the IMEI (International Mobile station  
Equipment Identity; refer GSM 03.03) number of the ME and the  
software version number. Text shall not contain the sequence  
0<CR> or OK<CR>  
9.9 ATI  
Identification Information  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Execute  
ATI[<value>]  
<information>  
This command causes the DCE to transmit one or more lines of text,  
followed by a final result code. As an option, <value> can be used to  
select from among multiple types of identifying information as shown  
in the table below.  
133  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
This command provides compatibility with Microsoft Windows 95.  
<value>  
Description  
0
Same information as +GMM command (model  
identification)  
1
Same information as +GMR command (revision  
identification)  
3
5
7
Modem model description  
Active settings  
Modem configuration profile (brief listing of the modem  
functionality: fax classes, Bluetooth, IrDA, modem type,  
etc.)  
8
9
DCE hardware type version  
PnP (plug and play) information  
9.10 AT+GCAP Request Modem Capabilities List  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request complete  
capability list  
AT+GCAP  
+GCAP: (list of  
supported  
<capability>s)  
Test if command is  
supported  
AT+GCAP=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Returns a list of valid modem command prefixes.  
<capability>  
Description  
GSM  
3G1 single mode  
3G1 dual mode  
+CGSM  
GSM commands  
Supported  
Supported  
Supported  
Supported  
+FCLASS  
Facsimile class 1  
and 2 commands  
Not supported  
Not supported  
+DS  
V.42 bis  
compression  
Supported  
Not supported  
Supported (only  
for Circuit  
Switched data  
calls in a GSM  
network)  
134  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
10. Interface  
10.1 AT+CPIN  
PIN Control  
See 3.23, AT+CPIN PIN Control  
10.2 AT&C  
Circuit 109 (DCD) Control  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set behavior of carrier  
detect  
AT&C[<value>]  
OK  
ERROR  
Determines the behaviour of the carrier detect.  
<value>  
Description  
0
1
DCD always on  
DCD follows the connection. Default value  
10.3 AT&D  
Circuit 108 (DTR) Response  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Control actions from  
DTE  
AT&D[<value>]  
OK  
ERROR  
Controls all actions initiated by data terminal ready from DTE.  
<value>  
Description  
0
1
Ignore. Default value  
When in on-line data mode, switch to on-line command  
mode. For all other states, see <value>=2  
2
Disconnect and switch to off-line command mode  
135  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
10.4 AT&S  
Circuit 107 (DSR) Response  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set behaviour of data  
set ready  
AT&S[<value>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Determines the behaviour of the data set ready signal.  
<value>  
Description  
0
1
DSR always on  
DSR on in data mode. DSR off in command mode. Default  
value  
10.5 AT+WS46  
Mode Selection  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Sets the cellular  
protocol mode  
AT+WS46=n  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Queries the current  
cellular protocol mode  
AT+WS46?  
• <n> OK  
• ERROR  
Queries the possible  
cellular protocol  
modes  
AT+WS46=?  
• (list of supported <n>s) OK  
• ERROR  
Allows an accessory to query and control the cellular protocol mode of  
the phone.  
<n> parameter  
Description  
12  
This value is used for GSM at 900 Mhz., DCS-1800, and  
PCS-1900 phones  
136  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
10. INTERFACE  
10.6 ATE  
Command Echo  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request Command  
Echo  
ATE[<value>]  
ATE=[<value>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
ATE?  
<value>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
ATE=?  
E: (list of supported  
<value>s)  
The setting of this parameter determines whether or not the DCE echoes  
characters received from the DTE during command state and online  
command state.  
<value>  
Description  
0
DCE does not echo characters during command state and  
online command state  
1
DCE echoes characters during command state and online  
command state. Default value  
10.7 ATV  
DCE Response Format  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set DCE response  
format  
ATV[=]<value>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the current  
setting  
ATV?  
V: <value>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
ATV=?  
V: (list of supported  
<value>s)  
Select either descriptive or numeric response codes. The ATV  
command sets the verbose numeric response codes and strips off the  
<S3><S4> additions to the command response.  
<value>  
Description  
0
1
Display numeric result codes  
Display verbose result codes. Default value  
137  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
List of result codes  
ATV1/ATV=1  
ATV0/ATV=0  
Description  
OK  
0
Acknowledges execution of a  
command  
CONNECT  
1
A connection has been established;  
the DCE is moving from command  
state to online data state  
RING  
2
3
The DCE has detected an incoming  
call signal from the network  
NO CARRIER  
The connection has been terminated  
or the attempt to establish a  
connection failed  
ERROR  
4
Command not recognized, command  
line maximum length exceeded,  
parameter value invalid, or other  
problem with processing the command  
line  
NO DIALTONE  
BUSY  
6
7
8
No dial tone detected  
Engaged (busy) signal detected  
NO ANSWER  
“@” (Wait for Quiet Answer) dial  
modifier was used, but remote ringing  
followed by five seconds of silence was  
not detected before expiration of the  
connection timer  
CONNECT  
<TEXT>  
Manufacturer  
-specific  
Same as CONNECT, but includes  
manufacturer-specific text that may  
specify DTE speed, line speed, error  
control, data compression, or other  
status  
10.8 ATZ  
Reset to Default Configuration  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Execute  
ATZ  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Execute  
ATZ=<profile>  
ATZ=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if supported and  
list available  
parameter range  
Z: (list of supported  
<profile>s)  
This command instructs the DCE to set all parameters to their default  
values as specified by the user. Consider hardware configuration  
switches or non-volatile parameter storage (if implemented) when using  
this command.  
138  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
10. INTERFACE  
Commands included on the same command line as the Z command will  
be ignored.  
<profile >  
Description  
0
Select the user profile to restore  
10.9 AT+CMUX Switch to 07.10 Multiplex Protocol  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Switch to 07.10  
AT+CMUX=<transpa  
rency>[,<subset>[,  
<port_speed>[,<N1>  
[,<T1>[,<N2>[,<T2>  
[,<T3>[,<k>]]]]]]]]  
+CME ERROR: <err>  
Returns current  
setting for  
multiplexer  
AT+CMUX?  
• +CMUX:<transparency>,  
<subset>,<port_speed>,<N1>  
,<T1>,<N2>,<T2>,<T3>[,<k>]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
Show list of  
supported  
services  
AT+CMUX=?  
• +CMUX: (list of supported  
<transparency>s),  
(list of supported <subset>s),  
(list of supported  
<port_speed>s),  
(list of supported <N1>s),  
(list of supported <T1>s),  
(list of supported <N2>s),  
(list of supported <T2>s),  
(list of supported <T3>s),  
(list of supported <k>)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
SI C25-68003  
The command is used to turn on the multiplexer. Only “no transparency  
is supported”. The parameter <k> is not used.  
The default values for the parameters below are for “no transparency”  
and “only UIH frames used”.  
<transparency>  
Description  
0
No transparency  
<subset>  
Description  
0
Only UIH frames used  
139  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<port_speed>  
Description  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9600bits/s  
19200bits/s  
38400bits/s  
57600bits/s  
115200bits/s  
230400bits/s  
460800bits/s  
<N1>  
Description  
31  
Default maximum frame size  
<T1>  
Description  
10  
100ms default timer  
<N2>  
Description  
3
Default maximum number of re-transmissions  
<T2>  
Description  
30  
300ms default timer  
<T3>  
Description  
10  
10s default timer  
<k>  
Description  
1..7  
Window size  
140  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. INTERFACE  
10.10 AT+CRES Restore SMS Settings  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Restore settings  
AT+CRES[=<profile>]  
AT+CRES=?  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Get available profiles  
• +CRES: (list of  
supported  
<profile>s)  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Restores message service settings from non-volatile memory to active  
memory. A TA can contain several profiles of settings. Settings  
specified in commands Service Centre Address +CSCA, Set Message  
Parameters +CSMP and Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB  
(if implemented) are restored. Certain settings, such as SIM SMS  
parameters, cannot be restored.  
<profile>  
Description  
0..2  
Profile number where settings are to be stored. Default  
value is 0  
10.11 AT+ICF  
Cable Interface Character Format  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Defines DTE-DCE  
character framing  
AT+ICF=[format[,parity]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the current  
setting  
AT+ICF?  
• +ICF:  
<format>,<parity>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+ICF=?  
• +ICF: (list of  
supported  
<format>s), (list of  
supported <parity>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This extended-format compound parameter is used to determine the  
local serial port start-stop (asynchronous) character framing used by the  
DCE to accept DTE commands, and while transmitting information text  
and result code, if this is not automatically determined; (Not  
supported) +IPR=0 forces +ICF=0 (see +IPR).  
<format>  
Description  
3
8 Data 1 Stop. Default value  
141  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<parity>  
Description  
3
Space. Default value  
10.12 AT+IFC  
DTE-DCE Local Flow Control  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Defines DTE-DCE local  
flow control  
AT+IFC=[<by_te>,  
[<by_ta>]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the current  
setting  
AT+IFC?  
+IFC: <by_te>,<by_ta>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+IFC=?  
+IFC: (list of supported  
<by_te>s,<by_ta>s)  
Defines the flow control between the modem and the computer when in  
on-line data mode.  
No flow control is enabled in any of the command modes.  
<by_te>  
Description  
0
1
No flow control on DTE  
Xon/Xoff flow control on DCE. Control characters are  
removed by the DCE interface  
2
3
RTS flow control on DCE. Default value  
Xon/Xoff flow control on DCE. Control characters are  
passed to the remote DCE/DTE  
<by_ta>  
Description  
0
1
2
No flow control on DCE  
Xon/Xoff flow control on DTE  
CTS flow control on DCE. Default value  
142  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
10. INTERFACE  
10.13 AT+ILRR  
Cable Interface Local Rate Reporting  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Defines DTE-DCE  
character framing  
AT+ILRR=<value>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the current  
setting  
AT+ILRR?  
+ILRR:<value>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+ILRR=?  
+ILRR:(list of supported  
<values>s)  
Specifies whether or not the extended-format “+ILRR:<rate>”  
information text is transmitted from the DCE to the DTE. The <rate>  
reported shall represent the current (negotiated or renegotiated) DTE-  
DCE rate. If enabled, the intermediate result code is transmitted after  
any modulation, error control or data compression reports are  
transmitted, and before any final result code (e.g. CONNECT) is  
transmitted. The <rate> is applied after the final result code is  
transmitted.  
<value>  
Description  
0
Disables reporting of local port rate (+ILRR: is not  
transmitted). Default value  
1
Enables reporting of local port rate (+ILRR: is transmitted)  
10.14 AT+IPR  
Cable Interface Port Command  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Defines fixed DTE rate  
AT+IPR=[rate]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the current  
setting  
AT+IPR?  
• +IPR:<rate>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+IPR=?  
• +IPR: (), (list of fixed-  
only <rate>s)]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Specifies the data rate at which the DCE will accept commands, in  
addition to 1200bits/s or 9600bits/s (as required in v25ter, subclause  
4.3). It may be used to select operation at rates used by the DTE, which  
the DCE is not capable of automatically detecting.  
143  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
The specified rate takes effect following the issuance of any result  
code(s) associated with the current command line.  
<rate>  
Description  
Discrete  
integer value  
The <rate> value specified shall be the rate in bits per  
second at which the DTE-DCE interface should operate,  
e.g. “19200” or “115200”. The rates supported by a  
particular DCE are manufacturer specific.  
The following rates, are supported;  
1200  
2400  
4800  
9600  
19200  
38400  
57600  
115200  
230400  
460800  
10.15 AT*E2ESC M2M Escape Sequence Guard Time  
Description  
Command  
Possible responses  
Set GPRS online  
command guard time  
AT*E2ESC=[<gt>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the current  
setting  
AT*E2ESC?  
*E2ESC: <gt>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*E2ESC=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Defines a guard time for the escape sequence in GPRS to return to on-  
line command mode i.e. if +++AT<CR> is received either as part of the  
data stream or a terminating string from the application and no further  
data is received for the duration of the guard time the modem will go  
into on line command mode. This guards against the modem  
accidentally going into on line command mode. The verbose format of  
+++AT<CR> is <S2><S2><S2>AT<S3>.  
<gt>  
Description  
0
No guard time. Default value  
1-10  
Guard time in seconds  
144  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
11. Network  
11.1 AT*E2CD  
Ericsson M2M Cell Description  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request network cell  
description  
AT*E2CD=<n>  
• ERROR  
• OK  
Read the command  
AT*E2CD?  
• *E2CD:  
<n>,<lac>,<ci>,<ta>  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*E2CD=?  
• *E2CD: (list of  
supported <n>s)  
• ERROR  
Controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code E2CD: when  
<n>=1, or when there is a change in one of the network cell parameters,  
E2CD: <lac>,<ci>,<ta>.  
Read command returns the status of result code presentation and several  
values, which show the network cell parameters.  
Location information <lac>, <ci> and <ta> are returned only when  
<n>=1 and the ME is registered in the network. To know if the ME is  
registered use the AT+CREG command. If the ME is not registered in  
the cellular network an ERROR message is returned.  
<n>  
Description  
0
Disable network location information unsolicited result  
code. Default value  
1
Enable network location information unsolicited result  
code *E2CD: <lac>,<ci>,<ta>  
<lac>  
Description  
String type  
Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format  
<ci>  
Description  
string type  
Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format  
145  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<ta>  
Description  
0-63  
According to GSM 04.18 V8.6.0, the coding of the timing  
advance value is the binary representation of the timing  
advance in bit periods; 1 bit period = 48/13 ìs. <ta> is the  
integer representation of the timing advance in binary  
format  
64-255  
Reserved  
146  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. NETWORK  
11.2 AT*E2EMM Ericsson M2M Engineering Monitoring Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set the  
AT*E2EMM= • ERROR  
response  
presentation  
mode  
<n>[,<m>]  
• OK  
Display mode  
neighbour cells  
are taken from  
the toplist  
*E2EMM:  
Serving Cell  
MCC,MNC,LAC,CellID,BSIC,Ch[,RxL,C1,  
C2][,RxLFull,RxLSub,RxQFull,RxQSub,TA,T  
N],  
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>  
[,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2>][,<rxlFull>,<rxlSub>,  
<rxqfull>,<rxqsub>,<ta>,<tn>],  
NeighBours Cells  
MCC,MNC,LAC,CellID,BSIC,Ch,RxL[,C1,  
C2],  
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,  
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]  
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,  
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]  
…
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,  
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]  
OK  
Compact mode.  
The first cell is the  
serving cell, the  
rest are  
neighbour cells  
taken from the  
toplist  
*E2EMM: <mcc>,<mnc>,<ci>,  
<bsic>,<ch>[,<rxl>][,<rxlSub>,<rxqsub>,  
<ta>],<mcc>,<mnc>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,  
<rxl>,  
<mcc>,<mnc>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>,  
…
<mcc>,<mnc>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>  
OK  
Verbose mode.  
The first cell is the  
serving cell and  
the rest are  
*E2EMM: <mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,  
<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>[,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2>]  
[,<rxlFull>,<rxlSub>,<rxqfull>,<rxqsub>,  
<ta>,<tn>],  
neighbour cells  
as provided by  
the network in  
the system info.  
messages (2 and  
5) and via the  
AT*E2NBTS  
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,  
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]  
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,  
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]  
…
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,  
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]  
command  
OK  
Reduced display  
mode - info. as  
display mode but  
without text  
*E2EMM: <mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,  
<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>[,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2>]  
[,<rxlFull>,<rxlSub>,<rxqfull>,<rxqsub>,  
<ta>,<tn>],  
headings or  
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,  
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]  
<CR><LF>  
separators,  
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,  
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]  
neighbour cells  
from top list  
…
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,  
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]  
OK  
Read the  
command  
AT*E2EMM? • *E2EMM: <n>  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT*E2EMM= • *E2EMM: (list of supported <n>s),(list  
?
of supported <m>s)  
• ERROR  
147  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
There are four presentation format modes (Display, Compact, Verbose,  
and Reduced Display) and two response types (one shot response or  
continuous unsolicited responses).  
The purpose of the presentation format mode Display is to display the  
data in a readable form, including headers and line breaks  
(<CR><LF>). This format is, however, not well suited for machine  
decoding. The formats Verbose, Compact and Reduced Display do not  
have headers or line breaks. Verbose mode displays more parameters  
than the compact mode.  
The response types give the user the choice of one a shot information or  
an unsolicited response with <m> seconds between each response.  
Examples  
AT*E2EMM=1  
*E2EMM:<CR><LF>  
Serving Cell<CR><LF>  
MCC,MNC,LAC,CellID,BSIC,Ch[,RxL,C1,C2][,RxLFull,RxLSub,  
RxQFull,RxQSub,TA,TN]<CR><LF>  
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>[,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2>][,<rxlFull>,  
<rxlSub>,<rxqfull>,<rxqsub>,<ta>,<tn>]<CR><LF>  
NeighBours Cells<CR><LF>  
MCC,MNC,LAC,CellID,BSIC,Ch,RxL[,C1,C2]<CR><LF>  
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]<CR><LF>  
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]<CR><LF>  
…
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]<CR><LF>  
OK  
AT*E2EMM=3  
*E2EMM: <servcell mcc>,<servcell mnc>,<servcell ci>,  
<servcell bsic>,<servcell ch>[,<servcell rxl>][,<servcell rxlSub>,  
<servcell rxqsub>,<servcell ta>],<neighborcell1 mcc>,  
<neighborcell1 mnc>,<neighborcell1 ci>,<neighborcell1 bsic>,  
<neighborcell1 ch>,<neighborcell1 rxl>,<neighborcell2 mcc>,  
<neighborcell2 mnc>,<neighborcell2 ci>,<neighborcell2 bsic>,  
<neighborcell2 ch>,<neighborcell2 rxl>,  
…
<neighborcelln mcc>,<neighborcellnmnc>,<neighborcellnci>,  
<neighborcelln bsic>,<neighborcelln ch>,<neighborcelln rxl>  
<CR><LF>  
OK  
AT*E2EMM=5  
*E2EMM: <servcell mcc>,<servcell mnc>,<servcell lac>,  
<servcell ci>,<servcell bsic>,<servcell ch>[,<servcell rxl>,  
<servcell C1>,<servcell C2>][,<servcell rxlFull>,<servcell rxlSub>,  
<servcell rxqfull>,<servcell rxqsub>,<servcell tn>,<servcell ta>],  
148  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. NETWORK  
<neighborcell1 mcc>,<neighborcell1 mnc>,<neighborcell1 lac>,  
<neighborcell1 ci>,<neighborcell1 bsic>,<neighborcell1 ch>,  
<neighborcell1 rxl>[,<neighborcell1 C1>,<neighborcell1 C2>],  
<neighborcell2 mcc>,<neighborcell2 mnc>,<neighborcell2 lac>,  
<neighborcell2 ci>,<neighborcell2 bsic>,<neighborcell2 ch>,  
<neighborcell2 rxl>[,<neighborcell2 C1>,<neighborcell2 C2>],  
…
<neighborcelln mcc>,<neighborcellnmnc>,<neighborcelln lac>,  
<neighborcelln ci>,<neighborcelln bsic>,<neighborcelln ch>,  
<neighborcelln rxl>[,<neighborcelln C1>,<neighborcelln C2>]  
<CR><LF>  
OK  
AT*E2EMM=7  
*E2EMM:<servcell mcc>,<servcell mnc>,<servcell lac>,  
<servcell ci>,<servcell bsic>,<servcell ch>[,<servcell rxl>,  
<servcell c1>,<servcell c2>][,<servcell rxlFull>,<servcell rxlSub>,  
<servcell rxqfull>,<servcell rxqsub>,<servcell ta>,<servcell tn>],  
<neighborcell1 mcc>,< neighborcell1 mnc>,<neighborcell1 lac>,  
<neighborcell1 ci>,<neighborcell1 bsic>,<neighborcell1 ch>,  
<neighborcell1 rxl>[,< neighborcell1 c1>,<neighborcell1 c2>],  
<neighborcell2 mcc>,<neighborcell2 mnc>,<neighborcell2 lac>,  
<neighborcell2 ci>,<neighborcell2 bsic>,<neighborcell2 ch>,  
<neighborcell2 rxl>[,<neighborcell2 c1>,<neighborcell2c2>]  
…
<neighborcelln mcc>,<neighborcelln mnc>,<neighborcelln lac>,  
<neighborcelln ci>,<neighborcelln bsic>,<neighborcelln ch>,  
<neighborcelln rxl>[,<neighborcelln c1>,<neighborcelln c2>]  
OK  
The mode setting <n> in the set command has the combination listed in  
the table below.  
When <n>=5, the shot information is the same as in <n>=1, but  
neighbouring cells, which have to be up to 16. This is the information  
that comes from the Serving Cell through the BCCH, reporting the BTS  
that are on the Serving Cell's surroundings.  
<n>  
Description  
0
Disable network monitoring unsolicited result code.  
Default value  
1
2
3
One shot presentation of the network location  
information. Display mode with headers and <CR><LF>  
line separators  
Enable network location information unsolicited result  
code in Display mode (like n=1). There will be continuous  
unsolicited information responses <m> seconds apart  
One shot presentation of the compact network location  
information  
149  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<n>  
Description  
4
Enable compact network location information unsolicited  
result code. There will be continuous unsolicited  
information responses <m> seconds apart  
5
One shot presentation of the network location information  
(verbose format), including 16 BTSs, coming from the  
Serving Cell signalling information  
6
7
As n=5 format but there will be continuous unsolicited  
information responses <m> seconds apart  
One shot presentation of the network information (same  
information as in n=1) but no headers or <CR><LF> line  
separators. Neighbor cells from the Toplist  
8
As n=7 format but there will be continuous unsolicited  
information responses <m> seconds apart  
<m>  
Description  
1-255  
Integer type giving time (in seconds) between unsolicited  
responses. Default value is 5  
<mcc>  
Description  
Integer type  
Three digits in decimal format. The Mobile Country Code  
identifies the PLMN serving cell country according to ITU  
<mnc>  
Description  
Integer type  
Two digits in decimal format. The Mobile Network Code  
identifies the PLMN operator in the serving cell  
<lac>  
Description  
Integer type  
Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format  
<ci>  
Description  
Integer type  
Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format  
<bsic>  
Description  
Integer type  
One byte Base Stations Identification code in  
hexadecimal format  
<ch>  
Description  
(0-1023)  
It represents the ARFCN that shows the Absolute RF  
Channel, which identifies the BCCH carrier  
150  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. NETWORK  
<rxl>  
Description  
Integer type  
Received Signal Strength level in dBm measured on idle  
mode  
<rxlfull>  
Description  
Integer type  
Received Signal Strength level in dBm. The Rx Level is  
taken in the Downlink and statistically is applied to 100  
TDMA frames of the TCH or during a SACCH multiframe  
<rxlsub>  
Description  
Integer type  
Received Signal Strength level in dBm. The Rx Level is  
taken from the DownLink signal and the average is  
applied to subset of SACCH frames  
<rxqfull>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BER < 0.1%  
0.26% < BER < 0.30%  
0.51% < BER < 0.64%  
1.0% < BER < 1.3%  
1.9% < BER < 2.7%  
3.8% < BER < 5.4%  
7.6% < BER < 11.0%  
BER > 15.0%  
<mcc>  
Description  
Integer type  
Three digits in decimal format. The Mobile Country Code  
identifies the PLMN serving cell country according to ITU  
<rxqsub> is the parameter that indicates the quality in the received  
signal on dedicated mode. The measurement average is applied to a  
subset of a SACCH multiframe.  
<rxqsub>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
BER < 0.1%  
0.26% < BER < 0.30%  
0.51% < BER < 0.64%  
1.0% < BER < 1.3%  
151  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<rxqsub>  
Description  
4
5
6
7
1.9% < BER < 2.7%  
3.8% < BER < 5.4%  
7.6% < BER < 11.0%  
BER > 15.0%  
<c1>  
Description  
Integer  
Path Loss criterion parameter for neighbour cells. The MS  
calculates this parameter, in idle mode, to decide if the  
cell is suitable to camp on. After the calculation the  
criterion is C1 > 0. See GSM 05.08  
<c2>  
Description  
Integer  
Cell reselection parameter for neighbour cells. This  
parameter shall optimise the selected cell reselection  
<ta>  
Description  
0-63  
According to GSM 04.18 V8.6.0, the coding of the timing  
advance value is the binary representation of the timing  
advance in bit periods; 1 bit period = 48/13 ìs. <ta> is the  
integer representation of the timing advance in binary  
format  
64-255  
Reserved  
<tn>  
Description  
0-7  
Its value indicates the time slot number in a traffic channel  
152  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. NETWORK  
11.3 AT*E2SPN M2M Service Provider Indication  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request service  
provider indication  
AT*E2SPN  
• *E2SPN: <spi>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*E2SPN=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Causes the MS to return the service provider name stored in the SIM  
card (<spi> parameter). The text will consist of a maximum of 16 bytes  
containing the service provider name stored in the EF  
file in the SIM  
SPN  
card (see GSM 11.11). ERROR is returned if the field is not present on  
the SIM.  
<spi>  
Description  
String  
String type field of maximum length 16 bytes; character  
set as specified by command Select TE character set  
+CSCS  
11.4 AT*EALS  
Ericsson Request ALS Status  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Requests current status  
for ALS  
AT*EALS  
• *EALS: <status>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the command is  
supported  
AT*EALS=?  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Used to request the MS to give ALS (Alternate Line Services) status.  
The information is available on the SIM card. If ALS is active, the user  
has two lines for voice calls. The line number or name tag for the line is  
then indicated on the display.  
<status>  
Description  
0
1
ALS function is not active (off)  
ALS function is active (on)  
153  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
11.5 AT*ECSP  
Ericsson Customer Service Profile  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Read the customer  
service profile from the  
SIM  
AT*ECSP=<service  
group>  
• *ECSP: <service  
group>,<services>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the command is  
supported  
AT*ECSP=?  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command is used to read the customer service profile (CSP) from  
the SIM. CSP is a list on the SIM, which indicates the services that are  
user accessible. Each of the services has a related bit within the CSP.  
The services are grouped into service groups, with a maximum of 8  
services in a group. For each service group, a bit mask tells which  
services are available (bit=1). Unused bits are set to 0.  
<service  
group>  
Description  
Byte  
Each service group has a corresponding number, service  
group code  
<services>  
Description  
byte  
Bit mask (8 bits), indicating the services within the service  
group  
Bit=0: unused or unavailable service  
Bit=1: available service  
154  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
11. NETWORK  
11.6 AT*EPNR  
Ericsson Read SIM Preferred Network  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Read entries in SIM  
preferred list  
AT*EPNR=<format>  
[,<index1>  
[,<index2]]  
• *EPNR:  
<index1>,<oper1>[...]  
*EPNR: <index2>,  
<oper2>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the command is  
supported and list the  
possible settings  
AT*EPNR=?  
• *EPNR: (list of  
supported <index>s),  
(list of supported  
<format>s)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command is used to read the SIM preferred list of networks  
(EF ).  
PLMNSEL  
<index1>  
Description  
integer  
Start index (>0)  
<index2>  
Description  
integer  
Stop index (>0)  
<format>  
Description  
2
Numeric <oper>  
<oper>  
Description  
string  
String indicates the code for the operator.  
E.g. GSM - Sweden - Europolitan: “24008” (3 + 2).  
PCS: 3 digits for country and 3 digits for network  
155  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
11.7 AT*EPNW Ericsson Write SIM Preferred Network  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Write/delete entries in  
SIM preferred list  
AT*EPNW=[<index>]  
[,<format>,<oper>]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the command is  
supported and list the  
possible settings  
AT*EPNW=?  
• *EPNW: (list of  
supported  
<index>s), (list of  
supported  
<format>)s  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command is used to edit the SIM preferred list of networks  
(EF ). The entry field <oper> contains mobile country code  
PLMNSEL  
(MCC) and mobile network code (MNC).  
<index>  
Description  
Integer  
Index to entry in SIM preferred list.  
The SIM preferred list contains at least 8 positions  
according to GSM 11.11  
<format>  
Description  
2
Numeric <oper>  
<oper>  
Description  
String  
String indicates the code for the operator.  
E.g. GSM – Sweden - Europolitan: “24008” (3 + 2).  
PCS: 3 digits for country and 3 digits for network  
11.8 AT*E2SSN Ericsson M2M SIM Serial Number  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request SIM Serial  
number  
AT*E2SSN?  
*E2ESSN: <SSN>  
Shows if the command  
is supported  
AT*E2SSN=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command requests the SIM serial number held in the ICCid field  
(address 2FE2) on the SIM and returns all valid characters to the TE.  
This field is detailed in GSM 11.11 section 10.1.1.  
<SSN>  
Description  
String without  
double quotes  
SIM serial number  
156  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
11. NETWORK  
EXAMPLES  
AT*E2SSN?  
8944110063503224707  
OK  
where the raw data contained in the ICCid field on the SIM is  
984411003605234207F7.  
Test command:  
AT*E2SSN=?  
OK  
11.9 AT*ESLN  
Ericsson Set Line Name  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Sets the line name tag  
in the MS  
AT*ESLN=<line>  
[,<name>]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the current  
setting  
AT*ESLN?  
• *ESLN:  
<line1>,<name1><CR><LF>  
*ESLN: <line2>,<name2>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the command is  
supported and list the  
possible settings  
AT*ESLN=?  
• *ESLN: (list of supported  
<line>s),<lname>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Sets the name tag for a selected line.  
<line>  
Description  
0
This means that the two lines will use the default name  
tags, i.e. “L1” and “L2”. Default value  
1
2
Line 1  
Line 2  
<name>  
Description  
String  
Characters for name tag  
This parameter is optional when <line> is set to 0  
<lname>  
Description  
Integer  
Maximum number of characters to use in <name> string  
(20)  
157  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
11.10 AT+CIMI Subscriber Identification  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Read IMSI  
AT+CIMI  
• <IMSI>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CIMI=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Causes the TA to return <IMSI>, identifying the individual SIM  
attached to the ME.  
<IMSI>  
Description  
string without  
double quotes  
International Mobile Subscriber Identity  
11.11 AT+CLCK Facility Lock  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request facility lock  
AT+CLCK=<fac>,  
<mode>[,<passwd>  
[,<class>]]  
• when <mode>=2 and  
command successful:  
+CLCK:  
<status>[,<class1>  
[<CR><LF>+CLCK:  
<status>,<class2>[...]]  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CLCK=?  
• +CLCK: (list of  
supported <fac>s)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
The command is used to lock, unlock or interrogate an ME or a network  
facility <fac>. A password is normally needed to carry out such actions.  
Call barring facilities are based on GSM supplementary services (refer  
to GSM 02.88). The interaction of these, with other commands based on  
other GSM supplementary services, is described in the GSM standard.  
<fac>  
Description  
“CS”  
“PS”  
CNTRL (lock CoNTRoL surface (e.g. phone keyboard))  
PH-SIM (lock PHone to SIM card) (ME asks password when  
other than current SIM card inserted)  
“SC”  
SIM (lock SIM card) (SIM asks password in ME power-up  
and when this lock command issued)  
“FD”  
“P2”  
SIM fixed dialling feature. PIN2 is required as a password  
SIM PIN2  
158  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
11. NETWORK  
<fac>  
Description  
“AO”  
“OI”  
“AI”  
“IR”  
BAOC (bar all outgoing calls)  
BOIC (bar outgoing international calls)  
BAIC (bar all incoming calls)  
BIC-Roam (bar incoming calls when roaming outside the  
home country)  
“OX”  
BOIC-exHC (bar outgoing international calls except to  
home country)  
“AB”  
“AG”  
“AC”  
“PN”  
“PU”  
“PP”  
“PC”  
All barring services  
All out going barring services  
All in coming barring services  
Network personalization  
Network subset personalization  
Service provider personalization  
Corporate personalization  
<mode>  
Description  
0
Unlock  
1
Lock  
2
Query status  
10  
Full lock (only valid for <fac>=“PS”, after power on always  
ask for password)  
<status>  
Description  
0
1
Not active  
Active  
<passw>  
Description  
string type  
Is the same as password specified for the facility from the  
ME user interface or with change password command,  
+CPWD  
<classx>  
Description  
1
2
4
8
Voice L1  
Data  
Fax  
Short message service  
159  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<classx>  
Description  
16  
Data circuit sync  
Data circuit async  
Dedicated packet access  
Voice L2  
32  
64  
128  
1..30  
When “no reply” is enabled or queried, this gives the time  
in seconds to wait before the call is forwarded. Default  
value is 20  
11.12 AT+CNUM Subscriber Number  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request subscriber  
number  
AT+CNUM  
• +CNUM:  
[<alpha1>],<number1>,<type1>  
[,<speed>,<service>[,<itc>]][<CR>  
<LF>+CNUM:  
[<alpha2>],<number2>,<type2>  
[,<speed>,<service> [,<itc>]][…]]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CNUM=?  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command returns the MSISDNs related to the subscriber (this  
information can be stored in the SIM or in the ME). If subscriber has  
different MSISDN for different services, each MSISDN is returned in a  
separate line.  
<alphax>  
Description  
Alphanumeric  
string  
Associated with <numberx>; used character set should be  
the one selected with the Select TE character set  
command, +CSCS  
<numberx>  
Description  
String type  
Phone number of format specified by <typex>  
<typex>  
Description  
Integer format Type of address, (refer to GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7)  
<speed>  
Description  
data rate  
As defined in subclause 6.7 GSM 07.07  
160  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
11. NETWORK  
<service>  
Description  
0
4
5
Asynchronous modem  
Voice  
Fax  
<itc>  
Description  
0
1
3.1kHz  
UDI  
11.13 AT+COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request connected  
line identification  
presentation  
AT+COLP=[<n>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+COLP?  
• +COLP: <n>,<m>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+COLP=?  
• +COLP: (list of  
supported <n>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command refers to the GSM/UMTS supplementary service COLP  
(Connected Line Identification Presentation) that enables a calling  
subscriber to get the connected line identity (COL) of the called party  
after setting up a mobile originated call. The command enables or  
disables the presentation of the COL at the TE. It has no effect on the  
execution of the supplementary service COLR in the network.  
When enabled (and allowed by the called subscriber), +COLP:  
<number>,<type>[,<subaddr>,<satype> [,<alpha>]] intermediate  
result code is returned from the TA to the TE before any +CR or V.25ter  
responses. It is manufacturer specific if this response is used when  
normal voice call is established.  
Read command gives the status of <n>, and also triggers an  
interrogation of the provision status of the COLP service according  
3GPP TS 22.081 (given in <m>).  
161  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound  
value.  
<n>  
Description  
0
1
Disable  
Enable  
<m>  
Description  
0
1
2
COLP not provisioned  
COLP provisioned  
unknown (e.g. no network, etc.)  
Intermediate Result codes:  
+COLP: <number>,<type>[,<subaddr>,<satype> [,<alpha>]]  
162  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. NETWORK  
11.14 AT+COPS Operator Selection  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request operator  
selection  
AT+COPS=[<mode> • +CME ERROR <err>  
[,<format>  
[,<oper>]]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Shows the current  
setting  
AT+COPS?  
• +COPS:  
<mode>[,<format>,  
<oper>]  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+COPS=?  
• +COPS: list of supported  
(<stat>,long  
alphanumeric <oper>,  
short alphanumeric  
<oper>,numeric  
<oper>)s  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Forces an attempt to select and register the GSM network operator.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
1
3
Automatic (<oper> field is ignored)  
Manual (<oper> field present)  
Set only <format> (for read command +COPS?), do not  
attempt registration/de-registration (<oper> field is  
ignored); this value is not applicable in read command  
response  
4
Manual/automatic (<oper> field present); if manual  
selection fails, automatic mode (<mode>=0) is entered  
<format>  
Description  
0
1
2
Automatic (<oper> field is ignored)  
Short format alphanumeric <oper>  
Numeric <oper>  
<oper>  
Description  
string type  
Format determined by the <format> setting  
163  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<stat>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
Unknown  
Available  
Current  
Forbidden  
11.15 AT+CREG Network Registration  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request network  
registration  
AT+CREG=[<n>]  
AT+CREG?  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the command  
• +CREG: <n>,<stat>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CREG=?  
• +CREG: (list of  
supported <n>s)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Set command controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code  
+CREG: <stat> when <n>=1 and there is a change in the ME network  
registration status.  
Read command returns the status of result code presentation and an  
integer <stat>, which shows whether the network has currently  
indicated the registration of the ME.  
Controls the presentation of the unsolicited result code +CREG.  
<n>  
Description  
0
Disable network registration unsolicited result code.  
Default value  
1
Enable network registration unsolicited result code  
<stat>  
Description  
0
Not registered, ME is not currently searching for a new  
operator to register with  
1
Registered, home network  
164  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
11. NETWORK  
<stat>  
Description  
2
Not registered, but ME is currently searching for a new  
operator to register with  
3
4
5
Registration denied  
Unknown  
Registered, roaming  
11.16 AT*ECPI  
Ciphering Indicator  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request activation of  
the ciphering  
AT*ECPI=<switch>  
AT*ECPI?  
• OK  
• +CME: <error>  
• ERROR  
indication  
Shows the current  
setting  
• *ECPI: <switch>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*ECPI=?  
• *ECPI: (list of supported  
<switch>es values)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command allows the external application to activate/deactivate the  
ciphering indication. The ciphering indication allows the external  
application to detect when the mobile connection becomes deciphered  
and thus unsecured.  
Test command gives the current value of the <switch> parameter,  
informing if the indicator is enabled or disabled.  
The ciphering indicator feature may be disabled by the home network  
operator setting data in the “administrative data” field (EFAD) in the  
SIM as defined in GSM 11.11.  
If this feature is not disabled by the SIM, then whenever a connection is  
in place, which is or becomes deciphered, an indication is given via the  
unsolicited result code *ECPV:<ciphering>.  
<switch>  
Description  
1
Ciphering indication is on. The unsolicited result code  
*ECPV is sent anytime the communication is unsecured  
and when it becomes secure again  
0
Ciphering indication is off. Disable the ciphering  
indication, *ECPV is not sent  
Unsolicited Result Codes:  
*ECPV: <ciphering>. Sent only when <switch> is set to 0.  
165  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Unsolicited Result Codes  
*ECPV - Ciphering Indicator  
SYNTAX - Unsolicited Result code  
Description  
Response  
When  
Set command informs  
the TE when a  
communication is  
unsecured due to the  
fact that the network  
is not enciphering the  
communication  
*ECPV: <ciphering>  
When AT*ECPI enables it,  
the *ECPV:<ciphering> is  
sent during a connection  
whenever the  
communication is not  
enciphered. If a  
connection becomes  
secure after that, the  
*ECPV:<ciphering> is sent  
again to indicate that now  
the communication is  
enciphered  
<ciphering>  
Description  
0
The connection is secured. The network enciphers the  
communication  
1
The connection is unsecured. The network does not  
encipher the communication  
166  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. NETWORK  
11.17 AT*E2NBTS Ericsson M2M Neighbour BTS  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set Neighbour  
Cells to monitor  
AT*E2NBTS=<ch1>,<bsic1>[,<ch2  
>,<bsic2>[,<ch3>,<bsic3>[,<ch4  
>,<bsic4>[,<ch5>,<bsic5>[,<ch6  
>,<bsic6>[,<ch7>,<bsic7>[,<ch8  
>,<bsic8>[,<ch9>,<bsic9>[,<ch1  
0>,<bsic10>[,<ch11>,<bsic11>[,<  
ch12>,<bsic12>[,<ch13>,<bsic13  
>[,<ch14>,<bsic14>[,<ch15>,<bsi  
c15>[,<ch16>,<bsic16>]]]]]]]]]]]]]  
]]  
• ERROR  
• OK  
Read the  
AT*E2NBTS?  
• *E2NBTS:  
monitored  
<mcc>,<mnc>,  
<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,  
<rxl><CR><LF>  
<mcc>,<mnc>,  
<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,  
<rxl><CR><LF>  
…
neighbour cells  
<mcc>,<mnc>,  
<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,  
<rxl><CR><LF>  
<CR><LF>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT*E2NBTS=?  
• *E2NBTS: (list of  
supported <ch>s)  
• ERROR  
The set command shall provide with the ARFCNs (<ch>) and the BSIC  
(the BSIC is a cell colour code) to the MS in order to monitor those  
channels, belonging to the neighbour cells, instead of the ones that come  
through the air interface, in the serving cell information broadcast  
channel.  
It is possible to update that information with up to 16 neighbour cells.  
If less than 16 <ch>s are provided, then the assigned channels shall  
substitute the last previous channel (given either by the BCCH or by  
another AT*E2NBTS command), if it is not in the list yet. Therefore,  
<ch1>,<bsic1> will substitute BTS 16 in the MS, <ch2>,<bsic2> to the  
BTS 15 and so on. If any of the <ch>s is already in the top-list, then it  
is skipped.  
The read command displays the data of every neighbour cell, including  
the following parameters: MCC, MNC, Cell ID, BSIC, Channel and Rx  
Level.  
<ch>  
Description  
(0-1023)  
It represents the ARFCN that shows the Absolute RF  
Channel, which identifies a BCCH carrier  
167  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<mcc>  
Description  
String Type  
Three digits in decimal format. The Mobile Country Code  
identifies the PLMN serving cell country according to ITU  
<mnc>  
Description  
String Type  
Two digits in decimal format. The Mobile Network Code  
identifies the PLMN operator in the serving cell  
<ci>  
Description  
String type  
Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format  
<bsic>  
Description  
String Type  
One byte Base Stations Identification code in  
hexadecimal format  
<rxl>  
Description  
String Type  
Received Signal Strength level in dBm, measured in idle  
mode  
168  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12. Phonebook  
12.1 AT*E2PBCS Ericsson M2M Phonebook Check Sum  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request phone book  
checksum  
AT*E2PBCS  
• *E2PBCS: <cks>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*E2PBCS=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Command causes the ME to return the phone book checksum <cks>  
stored internally . Phone book checksum is recalculated whenever there  
is a change in the phone book. By requesting the checksum, the external  
application can detect if the phone book in the ME has changed, without  
downloading the whole phone book.  
During the SIM initialisation process, it takes some time to download  
the phone book from the SIM card to the ME, depending on the number  
of entries. In case the command is invoked before the checksum has  
been calculated, the ME gives an ERROR message.  
<cks>  
Description  
Hex type  
1 byte in hexadecimal (between “”), containing the  
checksum  
12.2 AT*ESAG  
Ericsson Add to Group  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Adds a new item to the  
group with <gindex>  
AT*ESAG=<gindex>,  
<type>,  
<itemindex>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported and list the  
possible settings  
AT*ESAG=?  
• *ESAG: (list of  
supported  
<gindex>s, list of  
supported <type>s  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command adds a contact or a phone number to the current group.  
169  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<gindex>  
Description  
1-10  
The group index within the hierarchical phone book  
<type>  
Description  
1
2
Contact  
Phone number  
<itemindex>  
Description  
Integer  
The index of the contact/group/phone number to add.  
The <itemindex> parameter has the following meaning: if  
the item to add is a contact, the <itemindex> is the index  
of the contact in the contacts book. If the item to add is a  
phone number the <itemindex> is the index in the phone  
book  
12.3 AT*ESCG  
Ericsson Create Group  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Adds a new group to  
the hierarchical phone  
book  
AT*ESCG=<name>  
AT*ESCG=?  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Shows if the command  
is supported  
• *ESCG:  
<maxnamelength>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command creates a new group in the hierarchical phone book. The  
group is stored at the first available position. There are 10 group  
positions in the hierarchical phone book.  
<name>  
Description  
String  
The group name. Character set as specified by  
command Select TE Character Set (AT+CSCS)  
<maxnamelength>  
Description  
integer  
The maximum length of the grouping (bytes)  
170  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
12. PHONEBOOK  
12.4 AT*ESCN  
Ericsson Set Credit Card Number  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set up a credit  
card number  
AT*ESCN=<mode>  
[,<passwd>][,<indexn>]  
[,<asn>,<type>,<name>,  
<vercode>[,<send  
order>]]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
when mode=3:*ESCN:  
<indexn>,<asn>,<type>,  
<name>,<vercode>,  
<send order>  
When mode=4:*ESCN:  
<selindexn>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the  
command is  
supported  
AT*ESCN=?  
• *ESCN: (list of supported  
<index>s),(list of  
supported <mode>s),(list  
of supported <send  
order>s)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Command is used to:  
• set up a credit card number in the ME.  
• disable credit card calls.  
• enable one of the credit card call services.  
• query the settings for one of the services.  
• query the active credit call access server.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
Settings for a credit card call (<passwd>, <indexn>,  
<asn>,<type>,<name>,<vercode> [,<send order>]). The  
four (4) parameters (<passwd>, <indexn>, <asn>,  
<vercode>) are mandatory when <mode>=0. If all those  
are not submitted ERROR will be returned  
1
2
Disable credit card calling (<passwd>). If any other  
parameters are submitted, they are ignored  
Enable one of the credit card call services (<passwd>,  
<indexn>). If any other parameters are submitted, they  
are ignored  
3
4
Query (<passwd>, <indexn>). If any other parameters are  
submitted, they are ignored  
Query for the selected credit call access server. If any  
parameters are submitted, they are ignored  
<passwd>  
Description  
String  
character string, phone lock code “PS”, PH-SIM  
171  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<indexn>  
Description  
1
2
Index number to the first credit card call access server  
Index number to the second credit card call access server  
<selindexn>  
Description  
0
1
2
Credit card calling disabled  
Index number to the first credit card call access server  
Index number to the second credit card call access server  
<asn>  
Description  
String  
Character string <0..9,+>, max. 20 characters Phone  
number of format specified by <typex>  
<type>  
Description  
Integer format Type of address  
<name>  
Description  
String  
Character string of the name tag, for M&M. Maximum of  
18 characters  
<vercode>  
Description  
String  
Character string <0..9,#,*>. Maximum of 20 characters  
<send order>  
Description  
1
2
Verification code first. Default value  
phone number to call first  
172  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12. PHONEBOOK  
12.5 AT*ESDG  
Ericsson Delete Group  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Deletes a group  
defined in the  
hierarchical phone  
book  
AT*ESDG=<gindex>  
AT*ESDG=?  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
Show if the command  
is supported and list the  
possible <gindex>  
• *ESDG: list of  
<gindex>s  
• OK  
This command deletes the group at position <gindex> from the  
hierarchical phone book.  
<gindex>  
Description  
1-10  
The group index  
12.6 AT*ESDI  
Ericsson Delete Group Item  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Deletes the item in  
group <gindex> with  
position <index>  
AT*ESDI=<gindex>,<ind  
ex>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*ESDI=?  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
The command deletes the item with <index> in the group with  
<gindex>.  
<gindex>  
Description  
1-10  
The groups index within the hierarchical phone book  
<index>  
Description  
1-15  
The items index within the group  
173  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
12.7 AT*ESGR  
Ericsson Group Read  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Lists the groups defined  
in the hierarchical  
phone book  
AT*ESGR  
• *ESGR: <gindex1>,  
<name1>[<CR><LF>  
<gindex2>,  
<name2>..]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Shows if the command  
is supported  
AT*ESGR=?  
OK  
This command lists the groups in the hierarchical phone book.  
<gindex>  
Description  
1-10  
The group index  
<name>  
Description  
String  
The group name  
12.8 AT*EGIR  
Ericsson Group Item Read  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Lists the items in the  
<gindex> group  
AT*EGIR=<gindex>  
• *EGIR: <index1>,  
<type1>,<itemindex>  
[<CF><LF><index2>,  
<type2>, <itemindex>  
[...]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*EGIR=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command lists the items stored in the group identified by  
<gindex>.  
<gindex>  
Description  
1-10  
The groups index within the hierarchical phonebook  
<index>  
Description  
1-15  
The items index within the group  
<type>  
Description  
Integer  
The kind of item. See AT*ESAG <item> table for definition  
174  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
12. PHONEBOOK  
<itemindex>  
Description  
Integer  
The item's index within the phonebook/contacts/group  
12.9 AT*ESNU  
Ericsson Settings Number  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Sets a number in the  
MS  
AT*ESNU=<type>,  
<number>[,<number  
type>]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the command is  
supported and show  
possible settings  
AT*ESNU=?  
• *ESNU: (list of  
supported <type>s)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the current  
setting  
AT*ESNU?  
• *ESNU: <type 1>,  
<number 1>,  
<number type 1>  
<CR><LF> ….*ESNU:  
<type n>,  
<number n>,  
<number type n>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command sets a <type> number, in the format <number type>, in  
the MS.  
<type>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
Voice L1  
Voice L2  
Fax  
Data  
<number type>  
Description  
129  
Default value when dialling string does not include the  
international access code character ‘+’  
145  
Default value when dialling string includes the  
international access code character ‘+’  
<number>  
Description  
0-9, +  
Number  
175  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
12.10 AT+CPBF Phonebook Find  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Shows the current  
setting  
+CPBF=<findtext>  
• +CPBF:  
<index1>,<number>,<type>,  
<text>[[...]<CR><LF>+CBPF:  
<index2>,<number>,<type>,  
<text>]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
+CPBF=?  
• +CPBF: <nlength>,<tlength>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Returns phone book entries whose alphanumeric field starts with  
<findtext>. Only currently selected source will be searched for,  
<findtext>  
Description  
string type  
Field of maximum length <tlength>; character set as  
specified by the select TE character set command, +CSCS  
12.11 AT+CPBR Phonebook Read  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Read phone  
book entries  
+CPBR=<index1>  
[,<index2>]  
• +CPBR:<index1>,<number>,  
<type>,<text>[[,<text_date>,  
<text_time>]<CR><LF>+CPBR:  
<index2>,<number>,<type>,  
<text>[,<text_date>,  
<text_time>]]  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the  
command is  
supported  
+CPBR=?  
• +CPBR: (list of supported  
<index>s),<nlength>,<tlength>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Returns phone book entries in location number range <index1>...  
<index2> from the current phone book memory storage selected with  
+CPBS. If <index2> is left out, only location <index1> is returned.  
Entry fields returned are location number <indexn>, phone number  
stored there <number> (of format <type>) and text <text> associated  
with the number.  
<indexn>  
Description  
integer type  
Values in the range of location numbers of phone book  
memory  
176  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
12. PHONEBOOK  
<number>  
Description  
string type  
Phone number of format <type>  
<type>  
Description  
129  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international  
unknown  
145  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number  
Other values refer to GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7  
161  
128 - 255  
<text>  
Description  
string type  
Field of maximum length <tlength>;  
character set as specified by the select TE character set  
command, +CSCS.  
<nlength>  
Description  
integer type  
Value indicating the maximum length of field <number>  
<tlength>  
Description  
integer type  
Value indicating the maximum length of field <text>  
177  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
12.12 AT+CPBS Phone Storage  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set phone book  
storage  
AT+CPBS=<storage>  
[,<password>]  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the current  
setting  
AT+CPBS?  
• +CPBS: <storage>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the command is  
supported  
AT+CPBS=?  
• +CPBS: (list of  
supported  
<storage>s)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Selects phone book memory storage <storage>, which is used by other  
phone book commands. Read command returns currently selected  
memory, and when supported by manufacturer, number of used  
locations and total number of locations in the memory.  
<storage>  
Description  
“FD”  
“EN”  
“ME”  
“SM”  
“DC”  
“RC”  
“MC”  
Fixed dialled numbers  
Emergency numbers  
ME phone book  
SIM phone book  
ME dialled calls list (30 entries)  
ME received calls list (30 entries)  
ME missed calls list (30 entries)  
<passwd>  
Description  
String type  
Represents the password required when selecting  
password protected <storage>s, for example PIN2 for  
storage “ME”  
178  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
12. PHONEBOOK  
12.13 AT+CPBW Phonebook Write  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request phone book  
write  
AT+CPBW=[<index>]  
[, <number>[,<type>  
[,<text>]]]  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CPBW=?  
• +CPBW: (list of  
supported  
<index>s),<nlength>  
,(list of supported  
<type>s),<tlength>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Writes phone book entry in location number <index> in the current  
phone book memory storage area, selected with AT+CPBS. If the  
<number> and <text> parameters are omitted, the entry is deleted. If  
<index> is omitted but <number> is included, the entry is written to the  
first free location in the phone book.  
<index>  
Description  
integer type  
Values in the range of location numbers of phone book  
memory  
<number>  
Description  
string type  
Phone number of format <type>  
<type>  
Description  
integer format Type of address octet, default 145 when dialing string  
includes international access code character "+",  
otherwise 129. (refer to GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7)  
129  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international  
unknown  
145  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number  
Other values refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7  
161  
128-255  
<text>  
Description  
string type  
Field of maximum length <tlength>;  
character set as specified by the select TE character set  
command, +CSCS  
<nlength>  
Description  
integer type  
Value indicating the maximum length of field <number>  
179  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<tlength>  
integer type  
Description  
Value indicating the maximum length of field <text>  
180  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13. Short Message Services - Point to Point  
13.1 AT+CPIN  
PIN Control  
See 3.23, AT+CPIN PIN Control  
13.2 AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages  
See 6.10, AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages  
13.3 AT+CPMS Preferred Message Storage  
Common for both PDU (Protocol Data Unit) and Text Modes  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set preferred  
message storage  
AT+CPMS=<mem1>  
[,<mem2>]  
[,<mem3>]  
• +CPMS:  
<used1>,<total1>,<used2>,  
<total2>,<used3>,<total3>  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the command AT+CPMS?  
• +CPMS:  
<mem1>,<used1>,<total1,  
<mem2>,<used2>,<total2,  
<mem3>,<used3>,<total3>  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CPMS=?  
• +CPMS: (list of supported  
<mem1>s),(list of  
supported <mem2>s),(list  
of supported <mem3>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Selects memory storage <mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> to be used for  
reading, writing, etc. If chosen storage is not appropriate for the ME  
(but is supported by the TA), final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is  
returned.  
181  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Test command returns lists of memory storage supported by the TA.  
<mem1>  
Description  
string type  
Memory from which messages are read and deleted  
(commands List Messages +CMGL, Read Message  
+CMGR and Delete Message +CMGD)  
“ME”  
“SM”  
ME message storage  
SIM message storage. Default value  
<mem2>  
Description  
string type  
Memory to which writing and sending operations are  
made (commands Send Message from Storage +CMSS  
and Write Message to Memory +CMGW)  
“ME”  
“SM”  
ME message storage  
SIM message storage  
<mem3>  
Description  
string type  
Memory to which received SMs are preferred to be stored  
(unless forwarded directly to TE). Received CBMs are  
always stored in “BM” (or some manufacturer specific  
storage) unless directly forwarded to TE  
“ME”  
“SM”  
ME message storage  
SIM message storage  
<used1>,<used2>,<used3> Description  
integer type  
Total number of messages currently in  
<mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> respectively  
<total1>,<total2> ,<total3> Description  
integer type  
Total number of message locations in  
<mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> respectively  
182  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
13.4 AT+CSCA Service Centre Address  
Common for both PDU and Text Modes  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set service centre  
address  
AT+CSCA=<sca>  
[,<tosca>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CSCA?  
• +CSCA:  
<sca>,<tosca>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CSCA=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Updates the SMSC address, through which mobile originated SMs are  
transmitted. In text mode, the setting is used by send (+CMGS) and  
write (+CMGW) commands. In PDU mode, the setting is used by the  
same commands, but only when the length of the SMSC address coded  
into <pdu> parameter equals zero. Note that a “+” in front of the number  
in <sca> has precedence over the <tosca> parameter, so that a number  
starting with “+” will always be treated as an international number.  
<sca>  
Description  
string type  
GSM 04.11 (3G TS 24.011) RP SC address Address-Value  
field in string format; BCD numbers (or GSM default  
alphabet characters) are converted to characters of the  
currently selected TE character set  
<tosca>  
Description  
integer type  
GSM 04.11 (3G TS 24.011) RP SC address type-of-address  
octet in integer format  
129  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international  
unknown  
145  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number  
Other values refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7  
161  
128-255  
183  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
13.5 AT+CMGF Message Format  
Common for both PDU and Text Modes  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set message format  
AT+CMGF=<mode>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the current  
setting  
AT+CMGF?  
• +CMGF: <mode>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CMGF=?  
• +CMGF: (list of  
supported  
<mode>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command tells the TA, which input and output format to use for  
messages. The <mode> parameter indicates the format of messages  
used with send, list, read and write commands, and unsolicited result  
codes resulting from received messages. Mode can be either PDU mode  
(entire TP data units used) or text mode (headers and body of the  
messages given as separate parameters).  
Test command returns supported modes as a compound value.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
1
PDU mode  
Text mode  
13.6 AT+CMGW Write Message to Memory  
PDU Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Write message to  
memory  
AT+CMGW=<length>  
[,<stat>]<CR>  
PDU is given<ctrl-Z/ESC>  
• +CMGW: <index>  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CMGW=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Stores a message to memory storage <mem2>. Memory location  
<index> of the stored message is returned. By default message status  
will be set to ‘stored unsent’, but parameter <stat> allows other status  
values to be given. ME/TA manufacturer may choose to use different  
default <stat> values for different message types. Entering PDU is the  
184  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
13. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
same as specified by the send message command, +CMGS. If writing  
fails, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. See  
“AT+CPMS Preferred Message Storage”, page 181.  
<stat>  
Description  
2
Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)  
<index>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value in the range of location numbers supported by the  
associated memory  
<length>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of  
the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC  
address octets are not counted in the length)  
<pdu>  
Description  
...  
In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by  
GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts  
each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long  
hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is  
presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))  
In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format  
Text Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Write message to  
memory  
AT+CMGW [=<oa/da>  
[,<tooa/toda>[,<stat>]]]  
<CR>  
Text is entered <ctrl-Z/  
ESC>  
• +CMGW: <index>  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CMGW=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Stores message (either SMS-DELIVER or SMS-SUBMIT) to memory  
storage <mem2>. Memory location <index> of the stored message is  
returned. By default message status will be set to ‘stored unsent’, but  
parameter <stat> allows also other status values to be given. The  
entering of text is done as specified in the send message command,  
+CMGS. If writing fails, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is  
returned.  
185  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Note!  
SMS-COMMANDs and SMS-STATUS-REPORTs cannot be stored in  
text mode.  
<stat>  
Description  
2
Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)  
<oa>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Originating-Address Value in string format;  
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are  
converted to characters of the currently selected TE  
character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given  
by <tooa>  
<da>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;  
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are  
converted to characters of the currently selected TE  
character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given  
by <toda>  
<tooa>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 04.11 TP-Originating-Address Type-of-Address octet  
in integer format (default refer <toda>)  
<toda>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octet  
in integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43)  
default is 145, otherwise default is 129  
<index>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value in the range of location numbers supported by the  
associated memory  
186  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
13.7 AT+CMGS Send Message  
PDU Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Send message  
AT+CMGS=<length>  
<CR>  
PDU is given<ctrl-Z/  
ESC>  
• +CMGS:  
<mr>[,<ackpdu>]  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CMGS=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Sends a message from a TE to the network (SMS-SUBMIT). Message  
reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message  
delivery. Optionally, when AT+CSMS <service> value is 1 and there is  
network support, <ackpdu> is returned. Values can be used to identify  
message upon unsolicited delivery status report result code. If sending  
fails in a network or an ME error, final result code +CMS ERROR:  
<err> is returned. This command is abortable.  
• <length> must indicate the number of octets coded in the TP layer  
data unit to be given (i.e. SMSC address octets are excluded).  
• The TA shall send a four character sequence  
<CR><LF><greater_than><space> (IRA 13, 10, 62, 32) after  
command line is terminated with <CR>; after that PDU can be given  
from TE to ME/TA.  
• The DCD signal is in the ON state as PDU is given.  
• The echoing of given characters back from the TA is controlled by  
V.25ter echo command E.  
• The PDU shall be hexadecimal format (similarly as specified for  
<pdu>) and given in one line; ME/TA converts this coding into the  
actual octets of PDU.  
• When the length octet of the SMSC address (given in the <pdu>)  
equals zero, the SMSC address set with command Service Centre  
Address +CSCA is used.  
• Sending can be cancelled by giving <ESC> character (IRA 27).  
• <ctrl-Z> (IRA 26) must be used to indicate the ending of PDU.  
<mr>  
Description  
Integer type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format  
<length>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of  
the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC  
address octets are not counted in the length)  
187  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<ackpdu>  
Description  
...  
GSM 03.40 RP-User-Data element of RP-ACK PDU; format is  
same as for <pdu> in case of SMS, but without GSM 04.11  
SC address field and parameter shall be bounded by  
double quote characters like a normal string type  
parameter  
Text Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Send message  
AT+CMGS=<da>  
[,<toda>] <CR>  
Text is entered<ctrl-Z/  
ESC>  
• +CMGS:  
<mr>[,<scts>]  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CMGS=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Sends a message from a TE to the network (SMS-SUBMIT). Message  
reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message  
delivery. Optionally, when AT+CSMS <service> value is 1 and there is  
network support, <scts> is returned. Values can be used to identify  
message upon unsolicited delivery status report result code. If sending  
fails in a network or an ME error, final result code +CMS ERROR:  
<err> is returned. This command is abortable.  
• The entered text (GSM 03.40 TP-Data-Unit) is sent to address <da>  
and all current settings (refer Set Text Mode Parameters +CSMP and  
Service Centre Address +CSCA) are used to construct the actual  
PDU in the ME/TA.  
• The TA shall send a four character sequence  
<CR><LF><greater_than><space> (IRA 13, 10, 62, 32) after the  
command line is terminated with <CR>; after that text can be  
entered from the TE to the ME/TA.  
• The DCD signal is in the ON state as text is entered.  
• The echoing of entered characters back from the TA is controlled by  
V.25ter echo command E.  
• The entered text should be formatted as follows:  
if <dcs> (set with +CSMP) indicates that GSM 03.38 default  
alphabet is used and <fo> indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-  
Data-Header-Indication is not set:  
if TE character set other than “HEX” (refer command Select  
TE Character Set +CSCS in TS 07.07): ME/TA converts the  
entered text into GSM alphabet according to rules of Annex  
A; backspace can be used to delete last character and  
188  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
carriage returns can be used (previously mentioned four  
character sequence shall be sent to the TE after every  
carriage return entered by the user);  
if TE character set is “HEX”: the entered text should consist  
of two IRA character long hexadecimal numbers which  
ME/TA converts to 7-bit characters of GSM alphabet (e.g.  
17 (IRA 49 and 55) will be converted to character Π (GSM  
23));  
if <dcs> indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used  
or <fo> indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-  
Indication is set: the entered text should consist of two IRA  
character long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts into  
8-bit octet (e.g. two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65) will be  
converted to an octet with integer value 42).  
• Sending can be cancelled by giving <ESC> character (IRA 27).  
• <ctrl-Z> (IRA 26) must be used to indicate the ending of the  
message body.  
<da>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;  
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are  
converted to characters of the currently selected TE  
character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given  
by <toda>  
<toda>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octet  
in integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43)  
default is 145, otherwise default is 129  
<mr>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string  
format (refer <dt>)  
<mr>  
Description  
Integer  
GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference  
Example  
AT+CMGF=1  
OK  
AT+CSDH=1  
OK  
AT+CSMP=17,167,0,0  
OK  
189  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
AT+CMGS=“+447747008670”  
> Test SMSꢀ  
+CMGS: 15  
OK  
13.8 AT+CMSS Send From Storage  
PDU mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Send from storage  
AT+CMSS=<index>  
• +CMSS: <mr>  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CMSS=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Sends message with location value <index> from message storage  
<mem2> to the network (SMS-SUBMIT or SMS-COMMAND).  
Reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message  
delivery. If sending fails in a network or an ME error, final result code  
+CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. This command is abortable. See  
“AT+CPMS Preferred Message Storage”, page 181.  
<index>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value in the range of location numbers supported by the  
associated memory  
<mr>  
Description  
Integer type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format  
Text Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Send from storage  
AT+CMSS=<index>  
[,<da> [,<toda>]]  
• +CMSS: <mr> [,<scts>]  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CMSS=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Sends message with location value <index> from message storage  
<mem2> to the network (SMS-SUBMIT or SMS-COMMAND).  
Reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message  
delivery. Optionally, when +CSMS <service> value is 1 and network  
190  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
13. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
supports, <scts> is returned. If sending fails in a network or an ME  
error, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. This  
command is abortable.  
<index>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value in the range of location numbers supported by the  
associated memory  
<da>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;  
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are  
converted to characters of the currently selected TE  
character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given  
by <toda>  
<toda>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octet  
in integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43)  
default is 145, otherwise default is 129  
<scts>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string  
format (refer <dt>)  
<mr>  
Description  
Integer type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format  
13.9 AT+CMGC  
Send Command  
PDU Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Send command  
message  
AT+CMGC=<length><CR>  
<pdu><ctrl-Z/ESC>  
• if PDU mode  
(+CMGF=0) and  
sending successful:  
+CMGC:  
<mr>[,<ackpdu>]  
• if sending fails:  
+CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CMGC=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Sends a command message from a TE to the network (SMS-  
COMMAND). The entering of PDU is as specified in the send message  
command, +CMGS. Message reference value <mr> is returned to the  
191  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
TE on successful message delivery. Optionally (when +CSMS  
<service> value is 1 and network supports) <ackpdu> is returned.  
Values can be used to identify message upon unsolicited delivery status  
report result code. If sending fails in a network or an ME error, final  
result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. This command is  
abortable.  
<length>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of  
the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC  
address octets are not counted in the length)  
<pdu>  
Description  
String  
In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by  
GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts  
each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long  
hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is  
presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))  
In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format  
<mr>  
Description  
Integer type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format  
<ackpdu>  
Description  
String  
GSM 03.40 RP-User-Data element of RP-ACK PDU; format is  
same as for <pdu> in case of SMS, but without GSM 04.11  
SC address field and parameter shall be bounded by  
double quote characters like a normal string type  
parameter  
Text Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Send command  
message  
AT+CMGC=<fo>,<ct>[,<pid>  
[,<mn>[,<da>[,<toda>]]]]  
<CR>  
• if PDU mode  
(+CMGF=1) and  
sending successful:  
+CMGC:  
Text is entered<ctrl-Z/ESC>  
<mr>[,<scts>]  
• if sending fails:  
+CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
commands is  
supported  
AT+CMGC=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Sends a command message from a TE to the network (SMS-  
COMMAND). The entering of text is as specified in the send message  
command, +CMGS, but the format is fixed to be a sequence of two IRA  
character long hexadecimal numbers, which the ME/TA converts into  
192  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
8-bit octets (refer to +CMGS). Message reference value <mr> is  
returned to the TE on successful message delivery. Optionally, when  
+CSMS <service> value is 1 and there is network support, <scts> is  
returned. Values can be used to identify message upon unsolicited  
delivery status report result code. If sending fails in a network or an ME  
error, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. This  
command is abortable.  
<fo>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
First octet of SMS-DELIVER in integer format  
First octet of SMS_SUBMIT in integer format  
First octet of SMS-STATUS-REPORT in integer format  
First octet of SMS-COMMAND in integer format  
<ct>  
Description  
Integer  
GSM 03.40 TP-Command-Type. Default value is 0  
<pid>  
Description  
0-255  
Protocol Identifier in integer format. Default value is 0,  
according to 07.05 section 9.2.3.9  
<mn>  
Description  
Integer  
GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Number  
<da>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;  
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are  
converted to characters of the currently selected TE  
character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given  
by <toda>  
<toda>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octet  
in integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43)  
default is 145, otherwise default is 129  
<mr>  
Description  
Integer type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format  
<scts>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string  
format (refer to <dt>)  
193  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
13.10 AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE  
PDU Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set new message  
indication to TE  
AT+CNMI=[<mode>  
[,<mt>[,<bm>[,<ds>  
]]]]  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Shows the current  
setting  
AT+CNMI?  
• +CNMI:  
<mode>,<mt>,<bm>,<ds>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CNMI=?  
• +CNMI:  
(list of supported <mode>s),  
(list of supported <mt>s),  
(list of supported <bm>s),  
(list of supported <ds>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Selects the procedure for the way in which new messages received from  
the network, are indicated to the TE when it is active, e.g. DTR signal  
is ON. If the TE is inactive (DTR signal is OFF), message receiving is  
carried out as specified in GSM 03.38 (3G TS 23.038).  
If the command fails and the error is related to mobile equipment or  
network, the final result code CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.  
<mode>  
Description  
3
Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE. TA-TE  
link specific inband technique used to embed result  
codes and data when TA is in on-line data mode  
194  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
13. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
<mt>  
Description  
0
No SMS-DELIVER indications are routed to the TE.  
No class, Class 0, class 1 and class 3 use <mem3> as  
preferred storage. Class 2 messages shall be stored in the  
SIM. If it this is not possible then the MS shall send an error  
message accordingly to GSM 03.38  
1
2
SMS-DELIVER is stored into ME/TA and the indication of the  
memory location is routed to the TE using unsolicited result  
code:  
+CMTI: <mem>,<index>  
Class 0, class 1, and class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed  
directly to the TE using the unsolicited result code but not  
stored in ME/TA:  
+CMT:[<alpha >], <length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode  
enabled)  
Class 2 data coding scheme result in indication as defined  
in <mt>=1  
3
Class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed directly to TE using  
unsolicited result codes +CMT: <length><CR><LF><pdu>.  
Class 3 SMS-DELIVER is not stored in ME/TA. Messages of  
other data coding schemes result in indication as defined  
in <mt>=1  
<bm>  
Description  
0
Store message to “BM” (or some manufacturer specific  
memory). No CBM indications are routed to the TE  
2
New CBMs are routed directly to the TE using unsolicited  
result code:  
+CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode enabled).  
New CBMs are not stored in CBM memory  
<ds>  
Description  
0
No SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE. SMS-STATUS-  
REPORT is stored in ME/TA  
1
2
SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolicited  
result code: +CDS: < length>< CR>< LF>< pdu> (PDU  
mode enabled). SMS-STATUS-REPORT is not stored in ME/TA  
SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolicited  
result code: +CDSI: < mem><index> (PDU mode enabled).  
SMS-STATUS-REPORT is stored in ME/TA  
Unsolicited Result codes:  
+CMT: <length><CR><LF><pdu>  
+CMTI: <mem>,<index>  
+CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu>  
+CDS: <length><CR><LF><pdu>  
+CDSI: <mem><index>  
195  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Text Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set new message  
indication to TE  
AT+CNMI=[<mode>  
[,<mt>[,<bm>[,<ds>  
]]]]  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Shows the current  
setting  
AT+CNMI?  
• +CNMI:  
<mode>,<mt>,<bm>,<ds>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CNMI=?  
• +CNMI:  
(list of supported <mode>s),  
(list of supported <mt>s),  
(list of supported <bm>s),  
(list of supported <ds>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Selects the procedure for the way in which new messages received from  
the network, are indicated to the TE when it is active, e.g. DTR signal  
is ON. If TE is inactive (DTR signal is OFF), message receiving is  
carried out as specified in GSM 03.38 (3G TS 23.038).  
If the command fails and the error is related to mobile equipment or  
network, the final result code CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.  
<mode>  
Description  
3
Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE. TA-TE  
link specific inband technique used to embed result  
codes and data when TA is in on-line data mode  
<mt>  
Description  
0
No SMS-DELIVER indications are routed to the TE.  
No class, Class 0, class 1 and class 3 use <mem3> as  
preferred storage. Class 2 messages shall be stored in the  
SIM. If it this is not possible then the MS shall send an error  
message accordingly to GSM 03.38  
1
2
SMS-DELIVER is stored into ME/TA and the indication of the  
memory location is routed to the TE using unsolicited result  
code:  
+CMTI: <mem>,<index>  
Class 0, class 1, and class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed  
directly to the TE using the unsolicited result code:  
+CMT:<oa>, [<alpha>, <scts> [ ,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,  
<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF><data> (text mode  
enabled). About parameters in italics, refer to the show  
text mode command, +CSDH  
3
Class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed directly to TE using  
unsolicited result codes +CMT:<oa>, [<alpha>, <scts> [  
,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR>  
<LF><data> (Text Mode enabled). About parameters in  
italics, refer to the show text mode command, +CSDH.  
Messages of other data coding schemes result in  
indication as defined in <mt>=1  
196  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
<bm>  
Description  
0
Store message to “BM” (or some manufacturer specific  
memory). No CBM indications are routed to the TE  
2
New CBMs are routed directly to the TE using unsolicited  
result code:  
+CBM:  
<sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,<pages><CR><LF><data>  
(Text mode enabled)  
<ds>  
Description  
0
1
No SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE  
SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolicited  
result code: : +CDS:  
<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st> (Text mode  
enabled). SMS-STATUS-REPORT is not stored in ME/TA  
2
SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolicited  
result code: +CDSI: < mem><index> (Text mode enabled).  
SMS-STATUS-REPORT is stored in ME/TA  
Unsolicited Result codes:  
+CMT:<oa>, [<alpha>, <scts>  
[,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF>  
<data> (Text Mode enabled). Refer to the show text mode command,  
+CSDH for information on the parameters in italics.  
+CMTI: <mem>,<index>  
+CBM: <sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,<pages><CR><LF><data>  
+CDS: <fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>  
+CDSI: <mem><index>  
Example  
Display cell broadcast messages:  
AT+CNMI=3,0,2,0,0  
197  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
13.11 AT+CMGR Read Message  
PDU Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Read  
message  
AT+CMGR=  
<index>  
• +CMGR: <stat>,[<alpha>],<length>]  
<CR><LF><pdu>  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CMGR=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Returns message with location value <index> from preferred message  
storage <mem1> to the TE. Status of the message and entire message  
data unit <pdu> is returned. If status of the message is ‘received  
unread’, status in the storage changes to ‘received read’. If reading fails,  
final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.  
<stat>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
Received unread message (i.e. new message)  
Received read message  
Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)  
Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs)  
<index>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value in the range of location numbers supported by the  
associated memory  
<alpha>  
Description  
String type  
Manufacturing specific. Should be left empty but not  
omitted  
<length>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of  
the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC  
address octets are not counted in the length)  
<pdu>  
Description  
In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by  
GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts  
each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long  
hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is  
presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))  
In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format  
198  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
13. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
Text Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Read  
message  
AT+CMGR=  
[<index>]  
• if text mode (+CMGF=1), command  
successful and SMS-DELIVER:  
+CMGR:  
<stat>,<oa>,[<alpha>],<scts>,[<tooa>,  
<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,  
<length>]<CR><LF><data>  
• if text mode (+CMGF=1), command  
successful and SMS-SUBMIT:  
+CMGR:  
<stat>,<da>,[<alpha>],[<toda>,<fo>,  
<pid>,<dcs>,[<vp>],<sca>,<tosca>,  
<length>]<CR><LF><data>  
• if text mode (+CMGF=1), command  
successful and SMS-STATUS-REPORT:  
+CMGR:  
<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],  
<scts>,<dt>,<st>  
• if text mode (+CMGF=1), command  
successful and SMS-COMMAND:  
+CMGR:  
<stat>,<fo>,<ct>[,<pid>,[<mn>],[<da>],  
[<toda>],<length><CR><LF><cdata>]  
• if text mode (+CMGF=1), command  
successful and CBM storage:  
+CMGR:  
<stat>,<sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,  
<pages><CR><LF><data>  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CMGR=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Returns messages with location index <index> from message storage  
<mem1> to the TE. About text mode parameters in Italics, refer  
command Show Text Mode Parameters (+CSDH), If the status of the  
message is ‘received unread’, status in the storage changes to ‘received  
read’. If listing fails final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.  
<index>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value in the range of location numbers supported by  
<mem1>  
<stat>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
Received unread message (new message)  
Received read message  
Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)  
Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs)  
199  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<oa>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Originating-Address Value in string format;  
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are  
converted to characters of the currently selected TE  
character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given  
by <tooa>  
<da>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;  
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are  
converted to characters of the currently selected TE  
character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given  
by <toda>  
<toda>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octet  
in integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43)  
default is 145, otherwise default is 129  
<tooa>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 04.11 TP-Originating-Address Type-of-Address octet  
in integer format (default refer <toda>)  
<tora>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 04.11 TP-Recipient-Address Type-of-Address octet in  
integer format (default refer <toda>)  
<alpha>  
Description  
String type  
Manufacturing specific. Should be left empty but not  
omitted, i.e. commas shall mark the place were it should  
be. Used character set should be the one selected with  
command Select TE Character Set +CSCS  
<scts>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string  
format (refer <dt>)  
<length>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of  
the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC  
address octets are not counted in the length)  
200  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
<data>  
The entered text should be formatted as follows:  
if <dcs> (set with +CSMP) indicates that GSM 03.38 default alphabet is used and  
<fo> indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is not set:  
if TE character set other than "HEX" (refer command Select TE Character Set  
+CSCS in TS 07.07): ME/TA converts the entered text into GSM alphabet  
according to rules of Annex A; backspace can be used to delete last  
character and carriage returns can be used (previously mentioned four  
character sequence shall be sent to the TE after every carriage return  
entered by the user);  
if TE character set is "HEX": the entered text should consist of two IRA  
character long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts to 7-bit  
characters of GSM alphabet (e.g. 17 (IRA 49 and 55) will be converted to  
character Π (GSM 23));  
if <dcs> indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used or <fo> indicates  
that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is set: the entered text should  
consist of two IRA character long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts  
into 8-bit octet (e.g. two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65) will be converted to an  
octet with integer value 42);  
sending can be cancelled by giving <ESC> character (IRA 27)  
<ctrl-Z> (IRA 26) must be used to indicate the ending of the message body  
<fo>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
First octet of SMS-DELIVER in integer format  
First octet of SMS_SUBMIT in integer format  
First octet of SMS-STATUS-REPORT in integer format  
First octet of SMS-COMMAND in integer format  
<mr>  
Description  
Integer  
GSM 03.40 TP-Message_Reference  
<ra>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Recipient-Address-Value field. BCD (or GSM  
default alphabet) are converted to characters of the  
currently selected TE character set (refef command  
+CSCS. Type of address given by <tosca>  
<dt>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Discharge-Time in string format "yy/mm/  
dd,hh:mm:ss±zz where characters indicate year, month,  
day, hour,minutes, seconds and time zone  
<st>  
Description  
Integer  
GSM 03.40 TP-status  
201  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<ct>  
Description  
Integer  
GSM 03.40 TP--command-type. Default value is 0  
<sn>  
Description  
Integer  
GSM 03.41 CBM serial number  
<mid>  
Description  
String type  
All different possible combinations of CBM message  
identifiers (refer <mid>) (default is empty string);  
e.g. “0,1,5-7”  
<mid> GSM 03.41 CBM message identifier in integer format  
<page>  
Description  
Integer format GSM 03.41 CBM page parameter bits 4-7 in integer format  
<pages>  
Description  
Integer type  
GSM 03.41 CBM page parameter bits 0-3 in integer format  
<pid>  
Description  
0 - 255  
Protocol Identifier in integer format. Default value is 0,  
according to 07.05 section 9.2.3.9  
<dcs>  
Description  
0 - 255  
Data coding scheme. See GSM 03.48. UCS2 and  
compressed text not supported  
<sca>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 04.11 RP SC address Address-Value field in string  
format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet  
characters) are converted to characters of the currently  
selected TE character set  
<tosca>  
Description  
Integer type  
GSM 04.11 RP SC address type-of-address octet in integer  
format  
129  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international  
unknown  
145  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number  
Other values refer to GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7  
161  
128 - 255  
202  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
<vp>  
Description  
0 - 143  
(TP-VP+1) x 5 minutes (i.e. 5 minute intervals up to 12 hous)  
12 hours + ((TP_VP-143) x 30 minutes)  
(TP-VP-166) x 1 day  
144 - 167  
168 - 196  
197 - 255  
(TP-VP-192) x 1 week  
<mn>  
Description  
Integer type  
GSM 03.40 TP-message-number  
13.12 AT+CMGL List Message  
PDU Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
List message  
AT+CMGL [=<stat>] • +CMGL:  
<index>,<stat>,[<alpha>],<length>  
<CR><LF><pdu>[<CR><LF>  
+CMGL:  
<index>,<stat>,[<alpha>],<length>  
<CR><LF><pdu>[…]]  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CMGL=?  
• +CMGL: (list of supported <stat>s)  
Note!  
Returns messages with status value <stat> from preferred message  
storage <mem1> to the TE. Entire data units <pdu> are returned. If  
status of the message is ‘received unread’, status in the storage changes  
to ‘received read’. If listing fails, final result code +CMS ERROR:  
<err> is returned.  
<stat>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
Received unread message (i.e. new message)  
Received read message  
Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)  
Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs)  
All messages (only applicable to +CMGL command)  
<index>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value in the range of location numbers supported by the  
associated memory  
203  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<alpha>  
Description  
String type  
Manufacturing specific. Should be left empty but not  
omitted  
<length>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of  
the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC  
address octets are not counted in the length)  
<pdu>  
Description  
In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by  
GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts  
each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long  
hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is  
presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))  
In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format  
204  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
Text Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
List message  
AT+CMGL  
=[<stat>]  
• If text mode (+CMGF=1), command  
successful and SMS-SUBMITs and SMS-  
DELIVERs:  
+CMGL:  
<index1>,<stat>,<oa/da>,[<alpha>],  
[<scts>][,<tooa/toda>,<length>]  
<CR><LF><data>[<CR><LF>  
+CMGL:  
<index2>,<stat>,<oa/da>,[<alpha>],  
[<scts>][,<tooa/toda>,<length>]  
<CR><LF><data>[…]]  
• If text mode (+CMGF=1), command  
successful and SMS-STATUS-REPORT:  
+CMGL:  
<index1>,<stat>,<fo>,<mr>, [<ra>],  
[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st> [<CR><LF>  
+CMGL:  
<index2>,<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],  
[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>[…]]  
• If text mode (+CMGF=1), command  
successful and SMS-COMMANDs:  
+CMGL:  
<index>,<stat>,<fo>,<ct> [<CR><LF>  
+CMGL:  
<index>,<stat>,<fo>,<ct>[…]]  
• If text mode (+CMGF=1), command  
successful and CBM storage:  
+CMGL:  
<index>,<stat>,<sn>,<mid>,<page>,  
<pages>,<CR><LF><data>[<CR><LF>  
+CMGL:  
<index>,<stat>,<sn>,<mid>,<page>,  
<pages><CR><LF> <data>[…]]  
• Otherwise:  
+CMS ERROR: <err>  
Read the  
current  
setting  
• +CMGL:<stat>  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
Test if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CMGL=?  
• +CMGL: (list of supported <stat>s)  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
Returns messages with status value <stat> from message storage  
<mem1> to the TE. About text mode parameters in Italics, refer  
command Show Text Mode Parameters (+CSDH). If the status, of the  
message is ‘received unread’, status in the storage changes to ‘received  
read’. If listing fails final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.  
<index>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value in the range of location numbers supported by  
<mem1>  
205  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<stat>  
Description  
Integer  
Indicates the status of messages in memory  
0
1
2
3
4
Received unread message (new message)  
Received read message  
Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)  
Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs)  
All messages (only applicable to +CMGL command)  
<oa>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Originating-Address Value in string format;  
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are  
converted to characters of the currently selected TE  
character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given  
by <tooa>  
<da>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;  
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are  
converted to characters of the currently selected TE  
character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given  
by <toda>  
<toda>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octet  
in integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43)  
default is 145, otherwise default is 129  
<tooa>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 04.11 TP-Originating-Address Type-of-Address octet  
in integer format (default refer <toda>)  
<tora>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 04.11 TP-Recipient-Address Type-of-Address octet in  
integer format (default refer <toda>)  
<alpha>  
Description  
String type  
Manufacturing specific. Should be left empty but not  
omitted i.e.  
commas shall mark the place were it should be. Used  
character set should be the one selected with command  
Select TE Character Set +CSCS  
206  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
<scts>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 03.40 TP-service-centre-time-stamp in time-string  
format (refer <dt>)  
<length>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of  
the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC  
address octets are not counted in the length)  
<data>  
The entered text should be formatted as follows:  
if <dcs> (set with +CSMP) indicates that GSM 03.38 default alphabet is used and  
<fo> indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is not set:  
if TE character set other than "HEX" (refer command Select TE Character Set  
+CSCS in TS 07.07): ME/TA converts the entered text into GSM alphabet  
according to rules of Annex A; backspace can be used to delete last  
character and carriage returns can be used (previously mentioned four  
character sequence shall be sent to the TE after every carriage return  
entered by the user);  
if TE character set is "HEX": the entered text should consist of two IRA  
character long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts to 7-bit  
characters of GSM alphabet (e.g. 17 (IRA 49 and 55) will be converted to  
character Π (GSM 23));  
if <dcs> indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used or <fo> indicates  
that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is set: the entered text should  
consist of two IRA character long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts  
into 8-bit octet (e.g. two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65) will be converted to an  
octet with integer value 42);  
sending can be cancelled by giving <ESC> character (IRA 27)  
<ctrl-Z> (IRA 26) must be used to indicate the ending of the message body  
<fo>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
First octet of SMS-DELIVER in integer format  
First octet of SMS_SUBMIT in integer format  
First octet of SMS-STATUS-REPORT in integer format  
First octet of SMS-COMMAND in integer format  
<mr>  
Description  
Integer  
GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference  
<ra>  
Description  
String  
GSM 03.40 TP-Recipient-Address-Value field. BCD (or GSM  
default alphabet) are converted to characters of the  
currently selected TE character set (refef command  
+CSCS. Type of address given by <tosca>  
207  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<dt>  
Description  
String  
GSM 03.40 TP-Discharge-Time in string format "yy/MM/  
dd,hh:mm:ss+-zz where characters indicate year, month,  
day, hour,minutes, seconds and time zone  
<st>  
Description  
Integer  
GSM 03.40 TP-Status  
<ct>  
Description  
Integer  
GSM 03.40 TP-Command-Type (default 0)  
<sn>  
Description  
Integer  
GSM 03.41 CBM Serial Number  
<mid>  
Description  
String type  
All different possible combinations of CBM message  
identifiers (refer <mid>) (default is empty string);  
e.g. "0,1,5-7"  
<mid> GSM 03.41 CBM Message Identifier in integer  
format  
<page>  
Description  
Integer format GSM 03.41 CBM Page Parameter bits 4-7 in integer format  
<pages>  
Description  
Integer format GSM 03.41 CBM Page Parameter bits 0-3 in integer format  
Example  
AT+CMGF=1  
OK  
AT+CMGL=?  
+CMGL: “REC UNREAD”,“REC READ”,“STO UNSENT”,“STO  
SENT”,“ALL”  
OK  
208  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
13.13 AT+CMGD Delete Message  
Common for both PDU and Text modes  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Delete message  
AT+CMGD=<index>  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CMGD=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Deletes message from preferred message storage <mem1> location  
<index>. If deleting fails, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is  
returned. Test command shows the valid memory locations.  
<index>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value in the range of location numbers supported by the  
associated memory  
13.14 AT+CSDH Show Text Mode Parameters  
Only Applicable to Text Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set the show text  
mode  
AT+CSDH=[<show>]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
Display current settings  
AT+CSDH?  
• +CSDH: <show>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CSDH=?  
• +CSDH: (list of  
supported <show>s)  
• OK  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
Controls whether detailed header information is shown in text mode  
result codes.  
<show>  
Description  
0
Do not show header values defined in commands  
AT+CSCA and AT+CSMP (<sca>, <tosca>, <fo>, <vp>,  
<pid> and <dcs>) nor <length>, <toda> or <tooa> in  
+CMT, +CMGL, +CMGR result codes for SMS-DELIVERs and  
SMS-SUBMITs in text mode; for SMS-COMMANDs in +CMGR  
result code, do not show <pid>, <mn>, <da>, <toda>,  
<length> or <cdata>  
1
Show the values in result codes  
209  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
13.15 AT+CSMP Set Text Mode Parameters  
Only Applicable to Text Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set the text mode  
parameters  
AT+CSMP=[<fo  
> [,<vp>[,<pid>  
[,<dcs>]]]]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Display current  
settings  
AT+CSMP?  
• +CSMP: <fo>,<vp>,<pid>,<dcs>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CSMP=?  
• +CSMP: (List of supported <fo>s),  
(list of supported <vp>s), (list of  
supported <pid>s), (list of  
supported <dcs>s)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Used to select values for additional parameters needed when SM is sent  
to the network or placed in a storage when text format message mode is  
selected. It is possible to set the validity period starting from when the  
SM is received by the SMSC (<vp> is in range 0… 255). The <pid>  
parameter identifies the higher protocol being used or indicates  
interworking with a certain type of telematic service and <dcs>  
determines the way the information is encoded as in GSM 03.38.  
<fo>  
Description  
0-255  
Depending on the command or result code: first octet of  
GSM 03.40 SMS-DELIVER, SMS-SUBMIT (default value  
17),SMS-STATUS-REPORT, or SMS-COMMAND (default value  
2) in integer format  
<vp>  
Description  
0-143  
(TP-VP+1) x 5 minutes (i.e 5 minutes intervals up to 12 hous)  
12 hours + ((TP_VP-143) x 30 minutes)  
(TP-VP-166) x 1 day  
144-167  
168-196  
197-255  
(TP-VP-192) x 1 week  
<pid>  
Description  
0-255  
Protocol Identifier in integer format. Default value is 0,  
according to 07.05 section 9.2.3.9  
<dcs>  
Description  
0-255  
Data coding scheme. See GSM 03.38. UCS2 and  
compressed text not supported  
210  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
13. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
13.16 AT+CSCS Select Character Set  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set command informs  
TA which character set  
is used by the TE  
AT+CSCS=<chset>  
AT+CSCS?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
• +CSCS: <chset>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show list of supported  
character sets  
AT+CSCS=?  
• +CSCS: (list of  
supported <chset>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command informs the TA which character set <chset> is used by  
the TE. The TA is then able to convert character strings correctly  
between TE and ME character sets.  
When TA-TE interface is set to 8-bit operation and the used TE alphabet  
is 7-bit, the highest bit shall be set to zero.  
Note!  
How the internal alphabet of ME is converted to, or from, the TE  
alphabet is manufacturer specific.  
Read command shows current setting and test command display  
conversion schemes implemented in the TA.  
<chset>  
Description  
“GSM”  
GSM default alphabet (GSM 03.38 subclause 6.2.1).  
Default value  
“IRA”  
International reference alphabet (ITU-T T.50). Note:  
recommended default value by GSM 07.07.  
“8859-n”  
“UTF8”  
ISO 8859 Latin n (1-6) character set  
Universal text format, 8 bits  
“ERICSSON”  
Unicode, 16-bit universal multiple-octet coded character  
set (ISO/IEC10646)  
211  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
13.17 AT+CSMS Select Message Service  
Common for both PDU and Text Modes  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Select message  
service  
AT+CSMS=<service>  
• +CSMS:  
<mt>,<mo>,<bm>  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show supported  
message types along  
with the current  
service setting  
AT+CSMS?  
• +CSMS:  
<service>,<mt>,<mo>,  
<bm>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show list of supported  
services  
AT+CSMS=?  
• +CSMS: (list of  
supported <service>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Selects messaging service <service>. It returns the types of messages  
supported by the ME: <mt> for mobile terminated messages, <mo> for  
mobile originated messages and <bm> for broadcast type messages. If  
the chosen service is not supported by the ME (but is supported by the  
TA), final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.  
<service>  
Description  
0
GSM 03.40 and 03.41. The syntax of SMS AT commands is  
compatible with GSM 07.05 Phase 2 version 4.7.0; Phase 2+  
features which do not require new command syntax may  
be supported (e.g. correct routing of messages with new  
Phase 2+ data coding schemes)  
2..127  
Reserved  
<mt>  
Description  
0
1
Mobile terminated messages not supported  
Mobile terminated messages supported  
<mo>  
Description  
0
1
Mobile originated messages not supported  
Mobile originated messages supported  
<bm>  
Description  
0
1
Broadcast messages not supported  
Broadcast messages supported  
212  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
13. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
<err>  
Description  
0...127  
128...255  
300  
GSM 04.11 Annex E-2 values  
GSM 03.40 subclause 9.2.3.22 values  
ME failure  
302  
Operation not allowed  
Invalid PDU mode parameter  
SIM not inserted  
304  
310  
311  
SIM PIN required  
312  
PH-SIM PIN required  
SIM failure  
313  
314  
SIM busy  
315  
SIM wrong  
316  
SIM PUK required  
317  
SIM PIN2 required  
318  
SIM PUK2 required  
500  
Unknown error  
...511  
512...  
Other values in range 256...511 are reserved  
Manufacturer specific  
213  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
214  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14. Short Message Services - Cell Broadcast  
14.1 AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE  
See 13.10, AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE  
14.2 AT+CSCB Select Cell Broadcast Message Type  
Common for both PDU and text modes  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Select cell broadcast  
message type  
AT+CSCB=[<mode>  
[,<mids>]]  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Shows the current  
setting  
AT+CSCB?  
• +CSCB:  
<mode>,<mids>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CSCB=?  
• +CSCB: (list of  
supported  
<mode>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Selects which types of CBMs are to be received by the ME.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
Message types in <mids> and <dcss> are accepted  
<mids>  
Description  
string type  
All different possible combinations of CBM message  
identifiers (refer <mid>) (default is empty string);  
e.g. “0,1,5-7”  
<mid> GSM 03.41 CBM Message Identifier in integer  
format  
215  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
216  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15. SIM Application Toolkit  
15.1 AT+CPIN  
PIN Control  
See 3.23, AT+CPIN PIN Control  
15.2 AT*E2STKS SIM Application Toolkit Settings  
Description  
Command  
Possible responses  
Set the presentation of  
the unsolicited result  
codes corresponding to  
STK  
AT*E2STKS=<on_off>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the current status of  
the presentation of the  
unsolicited result codes  
AT*E2STKS?  
• *E2STKS: <on_off>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the command is  
supported  
AT*E2STKS=?  
• *E2STKD: list of  
supported <on_off>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Allows the external application to disable or enable the presentation of  
the unsolicited result codes corresponding to the STK commands.  
Parameter <on_off> is used to disable or enable the presentation of an  
unsolicited result code *E2STK. Setting chosen is stored internally so  
that it is not necessary to change it each time the ME is switched on.  
If the presentation of the unsolicited result codes is disabled, the  
messages below are not sent to the application.  
The unsolicited result codes shall be disabled by default.  
<on_off>  
Description  
0
Disable the presentation of the unsolicited result codes  
related to STK. Default value  
1
Enable the presentation of the unsolicited result codes  
related to STK  
Unsolicited Result Codes:  
The unsolicited result codes defined in sections below can be received.  
217  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
15.3 AT*E2STKD M2M STK Display Text  
Description  
Command  
Possible responses  
Answer to the  
reception of  
DISPLAY TEXT  
AT*E2STKD=<answer> • +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the  
command is  
supported  
AT*E2STKD=?  
• *E2STKD:  
(list of supported <answer>)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
The ME passes the parameters within DISPLAY TEXT command to  
the external application by means of the unsolicited result code  
*E2STKD.  
Command AT*E2STKD allows the external application to send the  
appropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, and  
before the timeout expires.  
If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR  
response is generated.  
Test command returns the list of supported <answer>. Values follow  
GSM 11.14 standard  
<answer>  
Description  
0
OK.  
Performed as required: the text was displayed and  
cleared as requested. It corresponds to ‘00’ Command  
performed successfully, described in the GSM standard  
1
2
3
4
Failed.  
User Terminated Session: the text was displayed as  
requested and the user wants to end the proactive  
session. It corresponds to ‘10’ Proactive session terminated  
by the user, described in the GSM standard  
Failed.  
User requests backwards move: the text was displayed as  
requested and the user wants to go backwards in the  
session. It corresponds to ‘11’ Backward move in the  
proactive SIM session requested by the user  
Failed.  
No response from user: the text was displayed, and  
although the clear condition was “Wait for user to clear”,  
the user did not react. It corresponds to ‘12’ no response  
from user  
Failed.  
Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed  
Unsolicited Result Codes:  
*E2STKD: <priority>,<clear_condition>,<coding>,<text_length>,  
<text>  
218  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
15. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT  
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.  
<priority>  
Description  
0
1
Display normal priority text  
Display high priority text  
<clear_condition>  
Description  
0
1
Clear message after a dalay  
Wait for user to clear message  
<coding>  
Description  
0
Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default 7-  
bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8 set  
to 0. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit  
1
Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-bit  
coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined in  
GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7 bit  
GSM default alphabet  
<text_length>  
Description  
Integter type  
Value indicating the maximum length of field <text>  
<text>  
Description  
string type  
Field of maximum length <text_length>, in string type  
format between "". Coding is defined in <coding>  
15.4 AT*E2STKG M2M STK Get Inkey  
Description  
Command  
Possible responses  
Answer to the  
reception of  
GET INKEY  
AT*E2STKG=<answer>, • +CME ERROR <err>  
[<response_type>,  
<user_response>]  
• OK  
Test if the  
command is  
supported  
AT*E2STKG=?  
• *E2STKG:  
(list of supported <answer>),  
(list of supported  
<response_type>),  
<user_response>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
The ME passes the parameters within GET INKEY command to the  
external application by means of the unsolicited result code E2STKG.  
The external application then sends AT*E2STKG with the user  
response.  
219  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Answer command allows the external application to send the  
appropriate answer, after receiving the unsolicited result code, and  
before the timeout expires.  
If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR  
response is generated.  
If <answer> parameter is not 0, a failure has occurred and no more  
parameters are sent. If the extra parameters are sent, the ME indicates  
ERROR.  
Test command returns the list of supported values, and the maximum  
value of <prompt_text_length>.  
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.  
<answer>  
Description  
0
OK.  
Performed as required: the text was displayed. It  
corresponds to ‘00’ Command performed successfully,  
described in the GSM standard  
1
2
3
Failed.  
User Terminated Session: the text was displayed as  
requested and the user wants to end the proactive  
session. It corresponds to ‘10’ Proactive session  
terminated by the user, described in the GSM standard  
Failed.  
User requests backward move: the text was displayed  
as requested and the user wants to go backwards in  
the session. It corresponds to ‘11’ Backward move in  
the proactive SIM session requested by the user  
Failed.  
No response from user: the text was displayed, and the  
user did not react. It corresponds to ‘12’ No response  
from user  
4
Failed.  
Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed  
<response_type>  
Description  
0
1
3
Response type shall be digits (0-9, *, # and +)  
Response type shall be SMS default alphabet  
Response type shall be “Yes/No” response  
<user_response>  
Description  
String type  
Field of 1 to 2 bytes length in string type format  
between “”. Coding is defined in <response_type>.  
Length shall be 2 bytes when coding is UCS2 .  
Otherwise it shall be 1 byte  
Unsolicited Result Codes:  
*E2STKG: <coding>,<prompt_text_length>,<prompt_text>  
220  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT  
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.  
<coding>  
Description  
0
Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS  
default 7-bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38  
with bit 8 set to 0. It corresponds to data coding  
scheme of 8 bit  
1
Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default  
7-bit coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as  
defined in GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding  
scheme of 7 bit GSM default alphabet  
<prompt_text_length>  
Description  
Integer type (0-235)  
Value indicating the maximum length of field  
<prompt_text>  
<prompt_text>  
Description  
String type  
Field of maximum length <prompt_text_length>, in  
string type format between “”. Coding is defined in  
<prompt_coding>.  
15.5 AT*E2STKI M2M STK Get Input  
Description  
Command  
Possible responses  
Answer to the  
reception of GET  
INPUT  
AT*E2STKI=<answer>, • +CME ERROR <err>  
[<response_type>,  
<response_length>,  
<user_response>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the  
command is  
supported  
AT*E2STKI=?  
• *E2STKI: (list of supported  
<answer>),(list of supported  
<response_type>),  
<response_length>,  
<user_response>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
The ME passes the parameters within GET INPUT command to the  
external application by means of the unsolicited result code E2STKI.  
The external application sends AT*E2STKI with the user response.  
AT*E2STKI allows the external application to send the appropriate  
answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, and before the  
timeout expires.  
If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR  
response is generated.  
If <answer> parameter is not 0, a failure has occurred and no more  
parameters are sent. If the extra parameters are sent, the ME indicates  
ERROR.  
221  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Test command returns the list of suported values, and  
<prompt_text_length>.  
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.  
<answer>  
Description  
0
OK.  
Performed as required: the text was displayed. It corresponds  
to ‘00’ command performed succesfully, described in the GSM  
standard  
1
2
Failed.  
User terminated session: the text was displayed as requested  
and the user wants to end the proactive session. It corresponds  
to ‘10’ proactive session terminated by the user, described in  
the GSM standard  
Failed.  
User requests backward move: the text was displayed as  
requested and the user wants to go backwards in the session.  
It corresponds to ‘11’ backward move in the proactive SIM  
session requested by the user  
3
4
Failed.  
No response from user: the text was displayed, and the user  
did not react. It corresponds to ‘12’ No response from user  
Failed.  
Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed  
<response_type>  
Description  
0
1
3
Response type shall be digits (0-9, *, # and +)  
Response type shall be SMS default alphabet  
Response type shall be “Yes/No” response  
<response_length>  
Description  
Integer type (0-160)  
Value indicating the length of response field  
<user_response>. It shall be an integer within the  
range between <min_length_response> and  
<max_length_response>  
<user_response>  
Description  
String type  
Field of length between <min_length_response> and  
<max_length_response>, in string type format between  
"". Coding is defined in <response_type>.  
Note!  
If <response_type>=3 (Yes/No), the length of <user_response> is  
1 byte. Otherwise, the ME gives an ERROR message.  
Unsolicited Result Codes:  
*E2STKI: <min_length_response>,<max_length_response>,  
<echo_input>,<prompt_coding>,<prompt_text_length>,  
<prompt_text>  
222  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT  
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.  
<min_length_response>  
Description  
Integer type (0-160)  
Value indicating the minimum length of  
response field <user_response>  
<max_length_response> Description  
Integer type (0-160)  
Value indicating the maximum length of  
response field <user_response>  
<echo_input>  
Description  
0
1
The user input shall be echoed  
The user input shall be hidden  
<prompt_coding>  
Description  
0
Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS  
default 7-bit coded alphabet, as defined in  
GSM 03.38 with bit 8 set to 0. It corresponds to  
data coding scheme of 8 bit  
1
2
Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS  
default 7-bit coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit  
octets, as defined in GSM 03.38. It corresponds  
to data coding scheme of 7 bit GSM default  
alphabet  
Text is coded in UCS2 alphabet, as defined in  
GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding  
scheme of 16 bit UCS2 alphabet  
<prompt_text_length>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value indicating the maximum length of field  
<prompt_text>  
<prompt_text>  
Description  
String type  
Field of maximum length <prompt_text_length>,  
in string type between “”. Coding is defined in  
<prompt_coding>  
223  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
15.6 AT*E2STKL M2M STK Select Item  
Description  
Command  
Possible responses  
Answer to the  
reception of  
SELECT ITEM  
AT*E2STKL=<answer>, • +CME ERROR <err>  
[<user_response>]  
AT*E2STKL=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the  
command is  
supported  
• *E2STKL: (list of supported  
<answer>),  
(list of supported  
<user_response>)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
The ME passes the parameters within SELECT ITEM command to the  
external application by means of the unsolicited result code *E2STKL.  
Command AT*E2STKL allows the external application to send the  
appropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, and  
before the timeout expires.  
If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR  
response is be generated.  
If <answer> parameter is not 0, a failure has occurred and no more  
parameters are sent. If the extra parameters are sent, the ME indicates  
ERROR.  
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.  
<answer>  
Description  
0
OK.  
Performed as required. It corresponds to ‘00’ command  
performed succesfully, described in the GSM standard  
1
2
Failed.  
User terminated session. It corresponds to ‘10’ Proactive  
session terminated by the user, described in the GSM  
standard  
Failed.  
User requests backwards move. It corresponds to ‘11’  
Backward move in the proactive SIM session requested  
by the user  
3
4
Failed.  
No response from user. It corresponds to ‘12’ no  
response from user  
Failed.  
Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed  
<user_response> Description  
integer type  
The identifier is a single byte between 1 and 255. It  
identifies the selected <item_idn> within the items list  
224  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
15. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT  
Unsolicited Result Codes:  
E2STKL: <NbrOfItems>,<coding>,<text_length>,<alpha_id>  
[,<default>]<CR><LF>E2STKL: <item_id1>,<coding>,  
<text_length>,<item1><CR><LF>[…]E2STKL: <item_idn>,  
<coding>,<text_length>,<itemn><CR><LF>]  
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.  
<coding>  
Description  
0
Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default  
7-bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8  
set to 0. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit  
1
Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-  
bit coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined  
in GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of  
7 bit GSM default alphabet  
<text_length>  
Description  
Integer type  
(0-240)  
Value indicating the maximum length of field  
<alpha_id>, <itemn1>,.<Itemn>  
<alpha_id>  
Description  
String type  
Field of string type between “”. Coding is according to  
AND  
EF  
as defined in GSM 11.11  
The maximum length is fixed  
<default>  
Description  
Integer type  
The <default> parameter is a single byte between 1 and  
255. It shows the default/selected item within the list  
<item_idn>  
Description  
Integer type  
The identifier is a single byte between 1 and 255. Each  
item <itemn> in the list shall have a unique identifer  
<item_idn>  
<itemn>  
Description  
String type  
Field of string type between “”. Coding is according to  
AND  
EF  
as defined in GSM 11.11  
<NbrOfItems>  
Description  
Integer type  
Number of items to be presented in the following  
unsolicited results  
The maximum length is fixed.  
225  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
15.7 AT*E2STKM M2M STK Set Up Menu  
Description  
Command  
Possible responses  
Answer to the  
reception of SET  
UP MENU  
AT*E2STKM=<answer>,  
<on_off>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the  
command is  
supported  
AT*E2STKM=?  
• *E2STKM: (list of supported  
<answer>),(list of supported  
<on_off>)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
The ME passes the parameters within SET UP MENU command to the  
external application, so that the STK menu can be built externally, by  
means of the unsolicited result code *E2STKM.  
The current menu can be removed by sending only the parameter  
<on_off> = 0.  
Answer command allows the external application to send the  
appropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, and  
before the timeout expires.  
If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR  
response is generated.  
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.  
<answer>  
Description  
0
OK.  
Performed as required: it corresponds to ‘00’ command  
performed successfully, described in the GSM standard  
1
2
3
Failed.  
User Terminated Session: the command was executed as  
requested and the user wants to end the proactive  
session. It corresponds to ‘10’ proactive session terminated  
by the user, described in the GSM standard  
Failed.  
User requests backwards move: the command was  
executed as requested and the user wants to go  
backwards in the session. It corresponds to ‘11’ backward  
move in the proactive SIM session requested by the user  
Failed.  
No response from user: the command was executed, and  
the user did not react. It corresponds to ‘12’ no response  
from user  
4
5
Failed.  
Screen is busy  
Failed.  
Command beyond MEs capability. It corresponds to ‘30’.  
It was not possible to successfully integrate or remove the  
list of menu items  
226  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
15. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT  
<on_off>  
Description  
0
1
Remove the current menu  
New menu to be displayed  
Unsolicited Result Codes:  
*E2STKM: <NbrOfItems>,<coding>,<text_length>,  
<alpha_id><CR><LF>E2STKM: <item_id1>,<coding>,  
<text_length>,<item1>[<CR><LF>[…]E2STKM: <item_idn>,  
<coding>,<text_length>,<itemn>]  
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.  
<coding>  
Description  
0
Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default 7-  
bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8 set  
to 0. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit  
1
Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-bit  
coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined in  
GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7 bit  
GSM default alphabet  
<text_length>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value indicating the maximum length of field <alpha_id>,  
<itemn1>, <Itemn>  
<alpha_id>  
Description  
String type  
Field of string type between "". Coding is according to  
AND  
EF  
as defined in GSM 11.11  
The maximum length is fixed.  
<item_idn>  
Description  
Integer type  
The identifier is a single byte between 1 and 255. Each  
item <itemn> in the list shall have a unique identifer  
<item_idn>  
<itemn>  
Description  
String type  
Field of string type format between “”. Coding is  
according to EF  
as defined in GSM 11.11  
AND  
<NbrOfltems>  
Description  
Integer type  
Number of Items to be presented in the following  
unsolicited results  
The maximum length is fixed.  
227  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
The parameters have no default values.  
15.8 AT*E2STKN M2M STK Envelope (Menu Selection)  
Description  
Command  
Possible responses  
Do the menu  
selection  
AT*E2STKN=<sel_item>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the  
command is  
supported  
AT*E2STKN=?  
• *E2STKN: (list of supported  
<sel_item>)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
The application informs the ME about the selected menu item by means  
of the AT*E2SKTN command. The ME answers with OK, or ERROR.  
The Do command allows the external application to select the menu  
item in the item list that was created by means of the SET-UP MENU  
command.  
<sel_item>  
Description  
Integer type  
The identifier is a single byte between 1 and 255. It  
identifies the selected menu item corresponding to SET-UP  
MENU command. Values follow the definition described in  
GSM 11.14  
15.9 AT*E2STKC M2M STK Set Up Call  
Description  
Command  
Possible responses  
Answer to the  
reception of SET UP  
CALL  
AT*E2STKC=<answer> • +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the  
command is  
supported  
AT*E2STKC=?  
• *E2STKC: (list of supported  
<answer>)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
The ME passes the parameters within SET UP CALL command to the  
external application by means of the unsolicited result code *E2STKC,  
so that it takes up the decision on progressing or rejecting the call.  
Answer command allows the external application to send the  
appropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, and  
before the timeout expires.  
If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR  
response is generated.  
228  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
15. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT  
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.  
<answer>  
Description  
0
OK.  
Performed as required. It corresponds to ‘00’ command  
performed succesfully, described in the GSM standard  
1
2
3
Failed.  
User terminated session. It corresponds to ‘10’ Proactive  
session terminated by the user, described in the GSM  
standard  
Failed.  
User requests backwards move. It corresponds to ‘11’  
backward move in the proactive SIM session requested by  
the user  
Failed.  
No response from user. It corresponds to ‘12’ no response  
from user  
4
6
7
Failed.  
Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed  
Failed.  
User rejected call set-up request. It corresponds to ‘22’  
Failed.  
User cleared down call before connection or network  
release. It corresponds to ‘23’  
Unsolicited Result Codes:  
*E2STKC: <ton>,<dial_string>,<SetUpRequirement>,<coding>,  
<text_length>,<alpha_id>  
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.  
<ton>  
Description  
Integer type  
Field of 1 byte indicating the Type of Number, coded as  
for EF  
. See GSM 04-08, section 10.5.4.7 for the allowed  
AND  
values  
<dial_string>  
Description  
String type  
Phone number of format <ton>  
<coding>  
Description  
0
Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default 7-  
bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8 set  
to 0. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit  
1
Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-bit  
coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined in  
GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7 bit  
GSM default alphabet  
229  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<text_length>  
Integer type (0-240)  
Description  
Value indicating the maximum length of field  
<alpha_id>  
<alpha_id>  
Description  
String type  
Field of string type between “”. Coding is according to  
AND  
EF  
as defined in GSM 11.11  
The maximum length is fixed  
15.10 *E2STKE  
STK Send Short Message  
Unsolicited Result Code:  
*E2STKE: <coding>, < text_length >, <alpha_id>  
The ME passes the <alpha_id> within SEND SHORT MESSAGE  
command to the external application, by means of the unsolicited result  
code *E2STKE. This informs the external application that the ME is  
sending an SMS.  
<coding>  
Description  
0
Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default 7-bit  
coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8 set to 0. It  
corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit  
1
Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-bit  
coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined in GSM  
03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7 bit GSM  
default alphabet  
<text_length>  
Description  
Integer type (0-240)  
Value indicating the maximum length of field  
<alpha_id>  
<alpha_id>  
Description  
String type  
Field of string type format between “”. Coding is  
according to EF  
as defined in GSM 11.11  
AND  
‘FF’  
In case that the SIM does not provide the optional alpha  
identifier, or this is a null data object, the ME shall give ‘FF’  
to indicate “Sending SMS”, so that the external  
application is informed  
The maximum length is fixed.  
230  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
15. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT  
15.11 *E2STKP  
STK Send SS  
Unsolicited Result Code:  
*E2STKP: <ton>, <SS_string>, <coding>, <text_length>, <alpha_id>,  
<SS_return>  
The ME passes the parameters within SEND SS command to the  
external application, by means of the unsolicited result code *E2STKP.  
This informs the external application that the ME has sent an SS string  
to the network, and provides the current status after this operation.  
<ton>  
Description  
integer type  
Field of 1 byte indicating the Type of Number, coded as  
for EF  
. See GSM 04-08, section 10.5.4.7 for the allowed  
AND  
values  
<SS_string>  
Description  
String type  
SS string of format <ton>  
<coding>  
Description  
0
Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default 7-  
bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8 set  
to 0. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit  
1
Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-bit  
coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined in  
GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7-bit  
GSM default alphabet  
<text_length>  
Description  
Integer type (0-240)  
Value indicating the maximum length of field  
<alpha_id>  
<alpha_id>  
Description  
String type  
Field of string type format between “”. Coding is  
according to EF  
as defined in GSM 11.11  
AND  
‘FF’  
In case that the SIM does not provide the optional alpha  
identifier, or this is a null data object, the ME shall give ‘FF’  
to indicate “SS string sent” so that the external application  
is informed  
The maximum length is fixed.  
<SS_return>  
Description  
Integer type  
Field of 1 byte indicating the SS Return Result Operation  
code, as defined in GSM 04.80, so that the external  
application is informed about the result of the SS  
operation  
231  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
15.12 *E2STKU  
STK Send USSD  
Unsolicited Result Code:  
*E2STKU: <coding>, <text_length>, <alpha_id>  
Description:  
The ME shall passes the <alpha_id> parameter within SEND USSD  
command to the external application, by means of the unsolicited result  
code *E2STKU. This informs the external application that the ME is  
sending a USSD string to the network.  
<coding>  
Description  
0
Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default 7-  
bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8 set  
to 0. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit  
1
Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-bit  
coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined in  
GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7-bit  
GSM default alphabet  
<text_length>  
Description  
Integer type (0-240)  
Value indicating the maximum length of field  
<alpha_id>  
<alpha_id>  
Description  
String type  
Field of string type format between “”. Coding is  
according to EF  
as defined in GSM 11.11  
AND  
‘FF’  
In case that the SIM does not provide the optional alpha  
identifier, or this is a null data object, the ME shall give ‘FF’  
to indicate “SS string sent” so that the external application  
is informed  
The maximum length is fixed.  
232  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
15. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT  
15.13 *E2STKR  
STK Refresh  
Unsolicited Result Code:  
*E2STKR: <indicator>  
The ME informs the external application about the coming REFRESH  
command, by means of the unsolicited result code *E2STKR (eg Reset  
is coming).  
<indicator>  
Description  
Integer type  
Indicator describes the mode that the SIM has requested  
when sending a REFRESH command  
0
1
2
3
4
SIM initialization and full file change notification  
File change notification  
SIM initialization and file change notification  
SIM initialization  
SIM reset  
15.14 AT*E2STKTO  
SIM Application Toolkit Settings  
Parameter Command Syntax:  
AT*E2STKTO = <Command>, <timer>  
This command allows the external application to configure some  
general settings related to STK.  
Defined values:  
Parameter <Command> is used to define the command that the time  
parameter is going to be applied.  
Parameter <timer> is used to fix the timeout period applicable to  
Proactive SIM mechanism.  
<Command>  
Description  
Integer type (0-6)  
It defines the command that the time parameter is  
going to be applied  
0
1
All the commands with timeout associated are set  
to the value of <timer>  
Set Up Menu command timeout is set to the value  
of <timer>  
233  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<Command>  
Description  
2
3
4
5
Set Up Call command timeout is set to the value of  
<timer>  
Display Text command timeout is set to the value of  
<timer>  
Get Input command timeout is set to the value of  
<timer>  
Select Item command timeout is set to the value of  
<timer>  
<timer>  
Description  
Integer type (0-99)  
Specifies the value in seconds to be set in the  
timeout associated with the command specified in  
<command>  
0
All the commands timeouts are set to its default  
value  
(1-99)  
The timeout of the command specified in  
<command> is set to this value  
Unsolicited result code:  
*E2STKTO: <command>  
234  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16. Supplementary Services  
16.1 AT+CPIN  
PIN Control  
See 3.23, AT+CPIN PIN Control  
16.2 AT+CACM Accumulated Call Meter  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Reset the ACM  
(Accumulated Call  
Meter) value on the  
SIM  
AT+CACM=[<passwd>] • +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current value AT+CACM?  
• +CACM: <acm>  
+CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Tests if the command is  
supported  
AT+CACM=?  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Resets the Advice of Charge related accumulated call meter value in  
SIM file EF . ACM contains the total number of home units for both  
ACM  
the current and preceding calls. SIM PIN2 is usually required to reset  
the value. If setting fails in an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is  
returned. See “+CME ERROR (Mobile Equipment Error Code)”, page  
57.  
Note!  
This command must take into account what line is chosen with  
AT*ELIN.  
Read command returns the current value of ACM.  
<passwd>  
Description  
String type  
SIM-PIN2  
<acm>  
Description  
String type  
Accumulated call meter value similarly coded as <ccm>  
under +CAOC  
235  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
16.3 AT+CAMM Accumulated Call Meter Maximum  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set command sets the  
Advice of Charge  
related accumulated  
call meter maximum  
value in SIM file  
AT+CAMM=[<acmmax> • +CME ERROR: <err>  
[,<passwd>]]  
AT+CAMM?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
EF  
ACMmax  
Read the current  
value  
• +CAMM:  
<acmmax>  
+CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the command if  
supported  
AT+CAMM=?  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Sets the Advice of Charge related accumulated call meter maximum  
value in SIM file EF . ACMmax contains the maximum number  
ACMmax  
of home units allowed to be consumed by the subscriber. When ACM  
(refer +CACM) reaches ACMmax calls are prohibited. SIM PIN2 is  
usually required to set the value. If setting fails in an ME error, +CME  
ERROR: <err> is returned.  
Read command returns the current value of ACMmax.  
<acmmax>  
Description  
String type  
Accumulated call meter maximum value similarly coded  
as <ccm> under +CAOC; value zero disables ACMmax  
feature  
<passwd>  
Description  
String type  
SIM PIN2  
236  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
16. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES  
16.4 AT+CAOC Advice of Charge  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Execute command  
AT+CAOC[=<mode>]  
• [+CAOC: <ccm>]  
+CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read command,  
shows the current  
mode  
AT+CAOC?  
• +CAOC: <mode>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test command, shows  
if the command is  
supported  
AT+CAOC=?  
• [+CAOC: (list of  
supported  
<mode>s]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Use of Advice of Charge supplementary service command enables the  
subscriber to get information about the cost of calls. With <mode>=0,  
the execute command returns the current call meter value from the ME.  
The command also includes the possibility to enable an unsolicited  
event reporting of the CCM information. The unsolicited result code  
+CCCM: <ccm> is sent when the CCM value changes, but no more than  
every 10 seconds. Deactivation of the unsolicited event reporting is  
made with the same command.  
Read command indicates whether the unsolicited reporting is activated  
or not. Read command is available when the unsolicited result code is  
supported.  
It is recommended (although optional) that the test command return the  
supported mode values.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
1
2
Query CCM value  
Deactivate the unsolicited reporting of CCM value  
Activate the unsolicited reporting of CCM value  
<ccm>  
Description  
String type  
Three bytes of the current call meter value in hexadecimal  
format (e.g. “00001E” indicates decimal value 30); value is  
in home units and bytes are similarly coded as ACMmax  
value in the SIM  
237  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
16.5 AT+CPUC Price Per Unit and Currency Table  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set command sets the  
parameters of Advice  
of Charge related  
AT+CPUC=<currency>,  
<ppu>[,<passwd>]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
price per unit and  
currency table in SIM  
file EF  
PUCT  
Shows the current  
values  
AT+CPUC?  
• +CPUC:  
<currency>,<ppu>  
+CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Shows if the command  
is supported  
AT+CPUC=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Sets the parameters of Advice of Charge related price per unit and  
currency table in SIM file EF . PUCT information can be used to  
PUCT  
convert the home units (as used in +CAOC, +CACM and +CAMM)  
into currency units. SIM PIN1 or SIM PIN2 (depending on which SIM  
card that is used) is required to set the parameters. If setting fails in an  
ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.  
Read command returns the current parameters of PUCT.  
For information on the character set see AT+CSCS in the Short  
Message Services section.  
<currency>  
Description  
String  
Alpha-identifier of the currency code (3 characters, e.g.  
SEK)  
<ppu>  
Description  
String type  
price per unit; dot is used as a decimal separator (e.g.  
“2.66”)  
<passwd>  
Description  
String type  
SIM PIN1 or SIM PIN2  
238  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
16. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES  
16.6 AT*EDIF  
Ericsson Divert Function  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Enable and disable  
notification with the  
unsolicited result code  
*EDIF  
AT*EDIF=<onoff>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT*EDIF?  
• *EDIF: <onoff>  
+CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*EDIF=?  
• *EDIF: (list of  
supported <onoff>s)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command enables and disables notification of divert status changes  
with the unsolicited result code *EDIF.  
<onoff>  
Description  
0
1
Disable notification with the unsolicited result code *EDIF  
Enable notification with the unsolicited result code *EDIF  
Unsolicited Result Codes:  
*EDIF: <reason>,<status>,<classx>[,<number>,<type>]  
239  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
16.7 AT*EIPS  
Identity Presentation Set  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Sets the alpha tag to  
be displayed in the ME  
AT*EIPS=<ID>,  
<alphatag mode>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the current  
setting  
AT*EIPS?  
• *EIPS: <ID1>,<alphatag  
mode1><CR><LF>  
*EIPS: <ID2>,<alphatag  
mode2><CR><LF>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the command is  
supported and list the  
possible settings  
AT*EIPS=?  
• *EIPS: (list of supported  
ID>s),(list of supported  
<alphatag mode>s)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command enables or disables the presentation of the alpha tag of  
the Caller ID and Called ID to the TE if the ID is recognized. The alpha  
tag is the first name and the last name. The presentation is done by an  
unsolicited result code, *ELIP for Caller ID and *EOLP for Called ID.  
<ID>  
Description  
1
2
Caller ID (*ELIP)  
Called ID (*EOLP)  
<alphatag mode>  
Description  
0
1
Off  
First name and last name displayed  
Unsolicited Result Codes:  
*ELIP:<alpha tag>  
*EOLP:<alpha tag>  
240  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
16. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES  
16.8 AT*ELIN  
Ericsson Line Set  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set the current line to  
<line>  
AT*ELIN=<line>  
• *ELIN: <line>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the current line  
AT*ELIN?  
• *ELIN: <line>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the command is  
supported  
AT*ELIN=?  
• *ELIN: list of  
supported <line>s  
+CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command requests the ME to set the current line to <line>.  
Note!  
The following command reads its value from the current line and is thus  
affected by the use of *ELIN:  
AT+CACM - Accumulated Call Meter  
<line>  
Description  
1
2
L1  
L2  
16.9 AT*E2SSD M2M Supplementary Service Dispatch  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Send Supplementary  
Service command  
AT*E2SSD=<SS_String>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Shows if the command  
is supported  
AT*E2SSD=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command allows the user to send a Public MMI command string  
in order to activate, deactivate, interrogate or modify settings for  
Supplementary Services.  
Once a string is sent, the command will return OK if parsed and sent  
successfully, otherwise ERROR is returned. The command does not  
verify that the operation executes successfully - use the AT*E2SSI  
command to gain feedback of the operation status.  
241  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Refer to GSM 02.30 for Public MMI services and codes.  
16.10 AT*E2SSI M2M Supplementary Service Indications  
This command allows the user to display the unsolicited response code  
*E2SSI on network responses (either command confirmation or error  
responses) for Supplementary Services. This can be used in conjunction  
with the AT+CSSN command which gives responses on the network  
notification of SS status.  
The default setting is OFF, where re( OFF,nORe)-61(9)5.6[(abl.3(e)-6dpon)9tus.  
242  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
   
16. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES  
<errorcode>  
Description  
4
SSI_SIM_ERROR  
5
SSI_NUMBER_ERR  
6
SSI_CALL_BARRED  
SSI_NOT_AVAILABLE  
SSI_UNSUCCESSFUL  
SSI_NOT_ALLOWED  
SSI_NETWORK_PROBLEM  
7
8
9
10  
<Opcode>  
Description  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
REGISTER_SS  
ERASE_SS  
ACTIVATE_SS  
DEACTIVATE_SS  
INTERROGATE_SS  
<SScode>  
Description  
0
ALL_SS  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
32  
33  
40  
41  
42  
43  
49  
64  
65  
66  
67  
ALL_LINE_IDENTIFICATION_SERVICES  
CALLING_LINE_IDENTIFICATION_PRESENTATION  
CALLING_LINE_IDENTIFICATION_RESTRICTION  
CONNECTED_LINE_IDENTIFICATION_PRESENTATION  
CONNECTED_LINE_IDENTIFICATION_RESTRICTION  
MALICIOUS_CALL_IDENTIFICATION  
ALL_FORWARDING_SERVICES  
CALL_FORWARDING_UNCONDITIONAL  
ALL_CONDITIONAL_FORWARDING_SERVICES  
CALL_FORWARDING_ON_MOBILE_SUBSCRIBER_BUSY  
CALL_FORWARDING_ON_NO_REPLY  
CALL_FORWARDING_ON_SUBSCRIBER_NOT_REACHABLE  
EXPLICIT_CALL_TRANSFER  
ALL_CALL_COMPLETION_SERVICES  
CALL_WAITING  
CALL_HOLD  
COMPLETION_OF_CALL_TO_BUSY_SUBSCRIBER  
243  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<SScode>  
Description  
81  
MULTI_PARTY  
112  
113  
114  
144  
145  
146  
147  
148  
ALL_CHARGING_SS  
ADVICE_OF_CHARGE_INFORMATION  
ADVICE_OF_CHARGE_CHARGING  
ALL_BARRING_SERVICES  
BARRING_OF_OUTGOING_CALLS  
BARRING_OF_ALL_OUTGOING_CALLS  
BARRING_OF_ALL_OUTGOING_INTERNATIONAL_CALLS  
BARRING_OF_ALL_OG_INTERNATIONAL_NON_HPLMN_  
DIRECTED_CALLS  
153  
154  
155  
BARRING_OF_INCOMING_CALLS  
BARRING_OF_ALL_INCOMING_CALLS  
BARRING_OF_ALL_IC_CALLS_WHEN_OUTSIDE_HPLMN  
<BasicServChoice>  
Description  
2
3
BEARER_SERVICE  
TELE_SERVICE  
<BasicServValue>  
Description  
<TELE_SERVICE>  
<BEARER_SERVICE>  
0
TS_ALL_TELE_SERVICES  
TS_SPEECH  
BS_ALL_BEARER_SERVICES  
BS_ALL_DATA_CDA_SERVICES  
BS_DATA_CDA_300BPS  
BS_DATA_CDA_1200BPS  
BS_DATA_CDA_2400BPS  
BS_DATA_CDA_4800BPS  
BS_DATA_CDA_9600BPS  
BS_ALL_DATA_CDS_SERVICES  
BS_DATA_CDS_300BPS  
16  
17  
18  
20  
21  
22  
24  
25  
26  
28  
29  
30  
32  
TS_TELEPHONY  
TS_EMERGENCY_CALLS  
BS_DATA_CDS_1200BPS  
BS_DATA_CDS_2400BPS  
BS_DATA_CDS_4800BPS  
BS_DATA_CDS_9600BPS  
TS_ALL_SHORT_MESSAGE_SERVICES BS_ALL_PAD_ACCESS_CA_SERVICES  
244  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES  
<BasicServValue>  
Description  
<TELE_SERVICE>  
<BEARER_SERVICE>  
33  
TS_SHORT_MESSAGE_MT_PP  
TS_SHORT_MESSAGE_MO_PP  
BS_PAD_ACCESS_CA_300BPS  
34  
BS_PAD_ACCESS_CA_1200BPS  
BS_PAD_ACCESS_CA_1200_75BPS  
BS_PAD_ACCESS_CA_2400BPS  
BS_PAD_ACCESS_CA_4800BPS  
BS_PAD_ACCESS_CA_9600BPS  
BS_ALL_DATA_PDS_SERVICES  
35  
36  
37  
38  
40  
44  
BS_DATA_PDS_2400BPS  
45  
BS_DATA_PDS_4800BPS  
46  
BS_DATA_PDS_9600BPS  
48  
BS_ALL_ALTERNATE_SPEECH_DATA_CDA  
BS_ALL_ALTERNATE_SPEECH_DATA_CDS  
BS_ALL_SPEECH_FOLLOWED_BY_DATA_CDA  
BS_ALL_SPEECH_FOLLOWED_BY_DATA_CDS  
BS_ALL_DATA_CIRCUIT_ASYNCHRONOUS  
BS_ALL_DATA_CIRCUIT_SYNCHRONOUS  
BS_ALL_ASYNCHRONOUS_SERVICES  
56  
64  
TS_VIDEOTEX  
TS_TELETEX  
72  
80  
88  
96  
TS_ALL_FAX_SERVICES  
97  
TS_FAX_GROUP3_ALTER_SPEECH  
TS_AUTOMATIC_FAX_GROUP3  
TS_FAX_GROUP4  
98  
99  
104  
112  
120  
128  
208  
209  
BS_ALL_SYNCHRONOUS_SERVICES  
BS_12_KBIT_UNRESTRICTED_DIGITAL  
TS_ALL_DATA_SERVICES  
TS_ALL_TELESERVICES_EXCEPT_SMS  
TS_AUXILIARY_SPEECH  
TS_AUXILIARY_TELEPHONY  
<SS_Status>  
Description  
0
1
2
NO_FLAG_SET  
SS_STATUS_ACTIVE  
SS_STATUS_REGISTERED  
245  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<SS_Status>  
Description  
4
7
SS_STATUS_PROVISIONED  
SS_STATUS_PRA  
<ForwardedToNr>  
Description  
String  
Phone number string in double quotes  
<NoReplyConditionTime>  
Description  
0-65532  
Integer value for time  
<CLI_Restriction Option>  
Description  
0
1
2
PERMANENT  
TEMPORARY_DEFAULT_RESTRICTED  
TEMPORARY_DEFAULT_ALLOWED  
<Subscription Option>  
Description  
1
2
5
OVERRIDE_CATEGORY  
CLI_RESTRICTION_OPTION  
RESTRICTION_PER_CALL  
246  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES  
16.11 AT+CCFC Call Forwarding number and Conditions  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request  
AT+CCFC=<reason> • +CME ERROR <err>  
Calling  
,<mode>[,<number  
>[,<type>[,<class>  
[,<satype>]]]]  
• when <mode>=2 and  
command successful:  
+CCFC:  
forwarding  
number and  
conditions  
<status>,<class1>[,<number>,  
<type>[,<satype>]][<CR><LF>  
+CCFC:  
<status>,<class2>[,<number>,  
<type>[,<satype>  
]][...]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CCFC=?  
• + CCFC: (list of supported  
<reason>s)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command allows control of the call forwarding supplementary  
service. Registration, erasure, activation, deactivation, and status query  
are supported. When querying the status of a network service  
(<mode>=2) the response line for ‘not active’ case (<status>=0) should  
be returned only if service is not active for any <class>.  
<reason>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
5
Unconditional  
Mobile busy  
No reply  
Not reachable  
All call forwarding  
All conditional call forwarding  
<mode>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
Disable  
Enable  
Query status  
Registration  
Erasure  
<number>  
Description  
string type  
String type phone number of forwarding address in format  
specified by <type>  
247  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<type>  
Description  
integer format  
129  
Type of address octet  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international  
unknown. Default value if ‘+’ is not in <sca>  
145  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number.  
Default value if ‘+’ is in <sca>  
161  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number  
Other values  
128 - 255  
<satype>  
Description  
integer format  
128  
Type of subaddress octet  
NSAP (X.213/ISO 8348 AD2), even number of address  
signals  
136  
NSAP (X.213/ISO 8348 AD2), odd number of address  
signals  
160  
User defined, even number of address signals  
User defined, odd number of address signals  
Other values reserved  
168  
128 - 255  
<classx>  
Description  
integer  
Sum of integers each representing a class of information.  
Default value is 7  
1
Voice L1  
2
Data  
4
Fax  
8
Short message service  
Data circuit sync  
Data circuit async  
Dedicated packet access  
Dedicated PAD access  
16  
32  
64  
128  
<status>  
Description  
0
1
Not active  
Active  
248  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES  
16.12 AT+CCWA Call Waiting  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request call  
waiting  
AT+CCWA=[<n>  
[,<mode>  
[,<class>]]]  
• when<mode>=2 and  
command successful:  
+CCWA:<status>,<class1>[<CR>  
<LF>  
+CCWA: <status>,<class2>[…]]  
+CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the  
current setting  
AT+CCWA?  
• +CCWA: <n>  
+CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CCWA=?  
• +CCWA: (list of supported <n>s)  
+CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command allows control of the call waiting supplementary service  
according to 3GPP TS 22.083. Activation, deactivation and status query  
are supported. When querying the status of a network service  
(<mode>=2) the response line for ‘not active’ case (<status>=0) should  
be returned only if service is not active for any <class>. Parameter <n>  
is used to disable or enable the presentation of an unsolicited result code  
+CCWA: <number>,<type>,<class>,[<alpha>][,<CLI validity>] to the  
TE when call waiting service is enabled. The command is abortable  
when the network is interrogated.  
The interaction of this command with other commands based on other  
GSM/UMTS supplementary services is described in the GSM/UMTS  
standards.  
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound  
value.  
<n>  
Description  
0
1
Disable  
Enable  
<mode>  
Description  
0
1
2
Disable  
Enable  
Query status  
249  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<classx>  
Description  
integer  
Sum of integers each representing a class of information.  
Default value is 7  
1
Voice L1  
2
Data  
4
Fax  
8
Short message service  
Data circuit sync  
Data circuit async  
Dedicated packet access  
Dedicated PAD access  
16  
32  
64  
128  
<status>  
Description  
0
1
Not active  
Active  
<number>  
Description  
String type  
String type phone number of forwarding address in format  
specified by <type>  
<type>  
Description  
Integer format Type of address octet in integer format (GSM 04.08  
10.5.4.7)  
<err>  
Description  
0
Phone failure  
3
Operation not allowed  
Operation not supported  
Invalid index  
4
21  
30  
31  
100  
No network service  
Network timeout  
Unknown  
Unsolicited Result Codes:  
+CCWA: <number>, <type>, <class>  
250  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES  
16.13 AT+CHLD Call Hold and Multiparty  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request call related  
supplementary  
services  
AT+CHLD=<n>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CHLD=?  
• +CHLD: (list of  
supported <n>s)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command allows control of the following call related services:  
• a call can be temporarily disconnected from the ME but the  
connection is retained by the network;  
• multiparty conversation (conference calls);  
• the served subscriber who has two calls (one held and the other  
either active or alerting) can connect the other parties and release the  
served subscriber's own connection.  
Calls can be put on hold, recovered, released, added to conversation,  
and transferred similarly as defined in 3GPP TS 22.030.  
This is based on the GSM/UMTS supplementary services HOLD (Call  
Hold; refer 3GPP TS 22.083 clause 2), MPTY (MultiParty; refer 3GPP  
TS 22.084) and ECT (Explicit Call Transfer; refer 3GPP TS 22.091).  
The interaction of this command with other commands based on other  
GSM/UMTS supplementary services is described in the GSM/UMTS  
standards.  
Note!  
Call Hold and MultiParty are only applicable to teleservice 11.  
It is recommended (although optional) that test command returns a list  
of operations which are supported. The call number required by some  
operations is denoted by “x” (e.g. +CHLD: (0,0x,1,1x,2,2x,3)).  
<n>  
Description  
...  
Integer type; equals to numbers entered before SEND  
button in GSM 02.30 subclause 4.5.5.1  
0
Releases all held calls or sets User Determined User Busy  
(UDUB) for a waiting call  
0X  
1
Releases a specific call X from a held multiparty call  
Releases all active calls (if any exist) and accepts the  
other (held or waiting) call  
1X  
Releases a specific active call X  
251  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<n>  
Description  
2
Places all active calls (if any exist) on hold and accepts  
the other (held or waiting) call  
2X  
Places all active calls on hold, except call X with which  
communication is supported  
3
4
Adds a held call to the conversation  
Connects the two calls and disconnects the subscriber  
from both calls (explicit call transfer)  
“X” is the numbering (starting with 1) of the call given by the sequence  
of setting up or receiving the calls (active, held or waiting) as seen by  
the served subscriber. Calls hold their number until they are released.  
New calls take the lowest available number. Where both a held and a  
waiting call exists, the above procedures shall apply to the waiting call  
(i.e. not to the held call) in conflicting situation.  
Note!  
The “directory number” case shall be handled with dial command D,  
and the END case with hangup command H (or +CHUP).  
16.14 AT+CLIP Call Line Identification Presentation  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Requests calling line  
identification.  
AT+CLIP=<n>  
OK  
Read the current  
setting  
AT+CLIP?  
+CLIP: <n>,<m>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CLIP=?  
+CLIP: (list of supported  
<n>s)  
This command enables a called subscriber to get the identity of the  
calling line when receiving a mobile terminated call. The “Set”  
command enables or disables the presentation of the CLI (calling line  
identity) at the TE. It has no effect on the execution of the  
supplementary service CLIP in the network.  
When the presentation of the CLI at the TE is enabled (if the calling  
subscriber has allowed it), the unsolicited result code  
+CLIP:<number>,<type>,,,<alpha> response is returned after every  
RING (or +CRING:<type>) result code sent from TA to TE (refer to AT  
+CRC in section ???????).Whether this will be used when a normal  
voice call is answered is a manufacturer-specific option.  
<n>  
Description  
0
1
Disables presentation. Default value  
Enables presentation  
252  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
16. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES  
<m>  
Description  
0
1
2
CLIP not provisioned  
CLIP provisioned  
Unknown (e.g. no network)  
Unsolicited Result codes:  
+CLIP: <number>, <type>,,,<alpha>  
Defined values:  
<number>  
Description  
String  
Type phone number of format specified by <type> type of  
address octet in integer format (refer to GSM 04.08, sub-  
clause 10.5.4.7)  
<type>  
Description  
129  
129 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/  
international unknown  
145  
145 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number  
161 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number  
Other values refer to GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7  
161  
128-255  
16.15 AT+CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request calling line  
identification restriction  
AT+CLIR=[<n>]  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the current  
setting  
AT+CLIR?  
• +CLIR: <n>,<m>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the command is  
supported  
AT+CLIR=?  
• +CLIR: (list of supported  
<n>s)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command refers to CLIR-service according to GSM 02.81 that  
allows a calling subscriber to enable or disable the presentation of the  
CLI to the called party when originating a call.  
Set command overrides the CLIR subscription (default is restricted or  
allowed) when temporary mode is provisioned as a default adjustment  
for all following outgoing calls. Using the opposite command can  
253  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
revoke this adjustment. If this command is used by a subscriber without  
provision of CLIR in permanent mode the network will act according  
GSM 02.81.  
The setting shall be per logical channel.  
When the MS is turned off and then turned on again the parameter  
setting <n> shall turn back to default, i.e. the presentation of CLI shall  
be used according to the subscription of the CLIR service, <n> is 0.  
Read command gives the default adjustment for all outgoing calls  
(given in <n>), and also triggers an interrogation of the provision status  
of the CLIR service (given in <m>).  
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound  
value.  
Note!  
On a per call base CLIR functionality is explained in subclause “ITU-T  
V.25ter dial command”.  
<n>  
Description  
0
Presentation indicator is used according to the  
subscription of the CLIR service  
1
2
CLIR invocation  
CLIR suppression  
<m>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
CLIR not provisioned  
CLIR provisioned in permanent mode  
Unknown (e.g. no network)  
CLIR temporary mode presentation restricted  
CLIR temporary mode presentation allowed  
254  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES  
16.16 AT+CSSN Supplementary Service Notification  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Presentation of  
notification result  
codes from TA to TE  
AT+CSSN=[<n>[,<m>]]  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Read the current  
setting  
AT+CSSN?  
• +CSSN: <n>,<m>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Test if the command is  
supported  
AT+CSSN=?  
• +CSSN: (list of  
supported <n>s),(list  
of supported <m>s)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command refers to supplementary service related network initiated  
notifications. The set command enables or disables the presentation of  
notification result codes from TA to TE.  
When <n>=1 and a supplementary service notification is received after  
a mobile originated call setup, unsolicited result code +CSSI:  
<code1>[,<index>] is sent to TE before any other MO call setup result  
codes presented in this ETS or in V.25ter. When several different  
<code1>s are received from the network, each of them shall have its  
own +CSSI result code.  
When <m>=1 and a supplementary service notification is received  
during a mobile terminated call setup or during a call, or when a forward  
check supplementary service notification is received, unsolicited result  
code +CSSU: <code2>[,<index>] is sent to TE. In case of MT call  
setup, result code is sent after every +CLIP result code (refer command  
“Calling line identification presentation +CLIP”) and when several  
different <code2>s are received from the network, each of them shall  
have its own +CSSU result code.  
Note!  
The difference between <index> and <cindex> is that <index> is a  
position mark while <cindex> is a unique value for each CUG. <index>  
is not supported.  
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound  
value.  
<n>  
Description  
0
1
Disable the +CSSI result code presentation status in the TA  
Enable the +CSSI result code presentation status in the TA  
255  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<m>  
Description  
0
1
Disable the +CSSU result code presentation status in the TA  
Enable the +CSSU result code presentation status in the TA  
<code1>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Unconditional call forwarding is active  
Some of the conditional call forwarding are active  
Call has been forwarded  
Call is waiting  
This is a CUG call (also <index> present)  
Outgoing calls are barred  
Incoming calls are barred  
CLIR suppression rejected  
<index>  
Description  
0…9  
10  
CUG index  
No index (preferred CUG taken from subscriber data)  
<code2>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
5
This is a forwarded call (MT call setup)  
This is a CUG call (also <index> present) (MT call setup)  
Call has been put on hold (during a voice call)  
Call has been retrieved (during a voice call)  
Multiparty call entered (during a voice call)  
Call on hold has been released (this is not a SS  
notification) (during a voice call)  
6
Forward check SS message received (can be received  
whenever)  
10  
Incoming call has been forwarded  
256  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES  
16.17 AT+CUSD Unstructured Supplementary Service Data  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request unstructured  
supplementary service  
data  
AT+CUSD=[<n>[,<str>]]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
Show supported  
message types along  
with the current service  
setting  
AT+CUSD?  
• +CUSD: <n>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show list of supported  
services  
AT+CUSD=?  
• +CUSD: (list of  
supported <n>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command allows control of the Unstructured Supplementary  
Service Data (USSD) according to GSM 02.90. Both network and  
mobile initiated operations are supported. Parameter <n> is used to  
disable/enable the presentation of an unsolicited result code (USSD  
response from the network, or network initiated operation) +CUSD:  
<m>[,<str>,<dcs>] to the TE. In addition, value <n>=2 is used to cancel  
an ongoing USSD session. If <n> is not given then the default value 0  
is taken.  
When <str> is given, a mobile initiated USSD string or a response  
USSD string to a network initiated operation is sent to the network. The  
response USSD string from the network is returned in a subsequent  
unsolicited +CUSD: result code.  
The interaction of this command with other commands based on other  
GSM supplementary services is described in the GSM standard.  
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound  
value.  
Some different scenarios are shown below:  
• An incoming network initiated USSD-Notify should be presented to  
the external application as an unsolicited result code +CUSD: if the  
external application has enabled result code presentation.  
• An incoming USSD-request asking for a reply should sent to the  
external application as an unsolicited result code +CUSD: if the  
external application has enabled result code.  
• If the external application answers to the request with the command  
AT+CUSD then the ME sends the answer to the network.  
• A USSD-request sent with the command AT+CUSD from the  
external application.  
257  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
The different alternatives are shown below.  
Network  
Mobile Equipment  
External application  
1
2
Signal  
Sends unsolicited  
result code +CUSD  
Result code presentation  
enabled, presented  
Signal asking  
for reply  
Sends unsolicited  
result code +CUSD  
Result code presentation  
enabled, presented  
3
Answer AT+CUSD  
Sends AT+CUSD  
3b  
<n>  
Description  
0
1
2
Disable result code presentation in the TA  
Enable result code presentation in the TA  
Terminate (abort) USSD dialogue. This value is not applicable to  
the read command response  
<str>  
Description  
string  
String type USSD (when <str> parameter is not given, network is not  
interrogated):  
-If <dcs> indicates that GSM 03.38 default alphabet is used:  
*if TE character set other than “HEX” (refer command Select TE  
Character Set +CSCS): ME/TA converts GSM alphabet into  
current TE character set according to rules of  
GSM 07.05 Annex A  
Example 1  
AT Command  
Result Code  
Description  
AT+CUSD=1,“*34#”  
Enable the Result Code  
presentation in the TAE  
and send a USSD-  
request  
+CUSD:1,“id code” OK  
+CUSD:0 OK  
Further user action  
required, give id code  
AT+CUSD=1,“7465338”  
Id code given  
No further user action  
required  
258  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES  
Example 2  
Example 3  
AT Command  
Result Code  
Description  
+CUSD:0,“Expensive  
incoming call”  
Incoming USSD-notify telling  
the user that the incoming call  
is expensive  
AT Command  
AT+CUSD=1,“*55*0700#”  
Result Code  
Description  
Enable the Result Code  
presentation in the TAE  
and send a USSD-request  
asking for an alarm at the  
time 07:00  
+CUSD:0,“ALARM”  
At 07:00 the network  
sends an alarm to the user  
259  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
260  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17. Alphabetical Listing of AT Commands  
AT Command  
Description  
Page No.  
AT  
Attention Command  
131  
135  
135  
131  
136  
131  
132  
97  
AT&C  
Circuit 109 (DCD) Control  
AT&D  
Circuit 108 (DTR) Response  
AT&F  
Set to Factory Defined Configuration  
Circuit 107 (DSR) Response  
AT&S  
AT&W  
Store User Profile  
AT*  
List all Supported AT Commands  
M2M Audio Profile Manipulation  
Ericsson M2M Cell Description  
Ericsson M2M Audio Profile Modification  
Ericsson M2M Engineering Monitoring Mode  
M2M Escape Sequence Guard Time  
Ericsson M2M Fax Comm. Baud Rate Modification  
Ericsson M2M Neighbour BTS  
Ericsson M2M Phonebook Check Sum  
M2M Service Provider Indication  
M2M Supplementary Service Dispatch  
M2M Supplementary Service Indications  
Ericsson M2M SIM Serial Number  
M2M STK Set Up Call  
AT*E2APR  
AT*E2CD  
AT*E2EAMS  
AT*E2EMM  
AT*E2ESC  
AT*E2FAX  
AT*E2NBTS  
AT*E2PBCS  
AT*E2SPN  
AT*E2SSD  
AT*E2SSI  
AT*E2SSN  
AT*E2STKC  
AT*E2STKD  
AT*E2STKG  
AT*E2STKI  
AT*E2STKL  
AT*E2STKM  
AT*E2STKN  
AT*E2STKO  
AT*E2STKS  
145  
91  
147  
144  
129  
167  
169  
153  
241  
242  
156  
228  
218  
219  
221  
224  
226  
228  
233  
217  
M2M STK Display Text  
M2M STK Get Inkey  
M2M STK Get Input  
M2M STK Select Item  
M2M STK Set Up Menu  
M2M STK Envelope (Menu Selection)  
SIM Application Toolkit Settings  
SIM Application Toolkit Settings  
261  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
AT Command  
Description  
Page No.  
AT*EALR  
AT*EALS  
AT*EAMS  
AT*EARS  
AT*ECAM  
AT*ECPI  
Ericsson Audio Line Request  
Ericsson Request ALS Status  
Ericsson Audio Mode Selection  
Ericsson Audio Ring Signal  
Ericsson Call Monitoring  
99  
153  
100  
101  
74  
Ciphering Indicator  
165  
154  
239  
75  
AT*ECSP  
AT*EDIF  
Ericsson Customer Service Profile  
Ericsson Divert Function  
AT*EDST  
AT*EGIR  
AT*EIPS  
Ericsson Daylight Saving Time  
Ericsson Group Item Read  
Identity Presentation Set  
134  
240  
102  
241  
76  
AT*ELAM  
AT*ELIN  
Ericsson Local Audio Mode  
Ericsson Line Set  
AT*EMAR  
AT*EMIC  
AT*EMIR  
AT*EPEE  
AT*EPNR  
AT*EPNW  
AT*ESAG  
AT*ESCG  
AT*ESCN  
AT*ESDG  
AT*ESDI  
Ericsson Master Reset  
Ericsson Microphone Mode  
Ericsson Music Mute Indication Request  
Ericsson Pin Event  
102  
103  
76  
Ericsson Read SIM Preferred Network  
Ericsson Write SIM Preferred Network  
Ericsson Add to Group  
155  
156  
169  
170  
171  
173  
173  
174  
157  
175  
103  
235  
236  
237  
105  
247  
Ericsson Create Group  
Ericsson Set Credit Card Number  
Ericsson Delete Group  
Ericsson Delete Group Item  
Ericsson Group Read  
AT*ESGR  
AT*ESLN  
AT*ESNU  
AT*EXVC  
AT+CACM  
AT+CAMM  
AT+CAOC  
AT+CBST  
AT+CCFC  
Ericsson Set Line Name  
Ericsson Settings Number  
Ericsson SET External Volume Control  
Accumulated Call Meter  
Accumulated Call Meter Maximum  
Advice of Charge  
Select Bearer Service Type  
Call Forwarding Number and Conditions  
262  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17. ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF AT COMMANDS  
AT Command  
Description  
Page No.  
AT+CCLK  
Set Clock and Date  
77  
249  
77  
AT+CCWA  
AT+CEER  
Call Waiting  
Extended Error Report  
AT+CFUN  
Set Phone Functionality  
78  
AT+CGACT  
AT+CGATT  
AT+CGDATA  
AT+CGDCONT  
AT+CGEREP  
AT+CGMI  
AT+CGMM  
AT+CGMR  
AT+CGPADDR  
AT+CGQMIN  
AT+CGQREQ  
AT+CGREG  
AT+CGSMS  
AT+CGSN  
AT+CHLD  
PDP Context Activate or Deactivate  
GPRS Attach or Detach  
109  
110  
111  
112  
114  
132  
132  
133  
115  
116  
118  
121  
122  
133  
251  
123  
124  
125  
126  
127  
65  
Enter Data State  
Define PDP Context  
GPRS Event Reporting  
Read MS Manufacturer Identification  
Read MS Model Identification  
Read MS Revision Identification  
Show PDP Address  
Quality of Service Profile (Minimum Acceptable)  
Quality of Service Profile (Requested)  
GPRS Network Registration Status  
Select Service for MO SMS Messages  
Read MS Product Serial Number Identification  
Call Hold and Multiparty  
AT+CHSC  
AT+CHSD  
AT+CHSN  
AT+CHSR  
HSCSD Current Call Parameters  
HSCSD Device Parameters  
HSCSD Non Transparent Call Configuration  
HSCSD Parameters Report  
HSCSD Automatic User Initiated Upgrading  
Hang Up Call  
AT+CHSU  
AT+CHUP  
AT+CIMI  
Subscriber Identification  
158  
79  
AT+CIND  
Indicator Control  
AT+CLAC  
AT+CLCK  
List All Available AT Commands  
Facility Lock  
80  
158  
252  
253  
80  
AT+CLIP  
Calling Line Identification  
AT+CLIR  
Calling Line Identification Restriction  
Mobile Equipment Error  
AT+CMEE  
AT+CMER  
Mobile Equipment Event Reporting  
81  
263  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
AT Command  
Description  
Page No.  
AT+CMGC  
AT+CMGD  
AT+CMGF  
AT+CMGL  
AT+CMGR  
AT+CMGS  
AT+CMGW  
AT+CMOD  
AT+CMSS  
AT+CMUX  
AT+CNMI  
AT+CNUM  
AT+COLP  
AT+COPS  
AT+CPAS  
AT+CPBF  
AT+CPBR  
AT+CPBS  
AT+CPBW  
AT+CPIN  
Send Command  
191  
209  
184  
203  
198  
187  
184  
66  
Delete Message  
Message Format  
List Message  
Read Message  
Send Message  
Write Message to Memory  
Call Mode  
Send From Storage  
190  
139  
194  
160  
161  
163  
82  
Switch to 07.10 Multiplex Protocol  
New Message Indications to TE  
Subscriber Number  
Connected Line Identification Presentation  
Operator Selection  
Phone Activity Status  
Phonebook Find  
176  
176  
178  
179  
83  
Phonebook Read  
Phone Storage  
Phonebook Write  
PIN Control  
AT+CPMS  
AT+CPUC  
AT+CPWD  
AT+CR  
Preferred Message Storage  
Price Per Unit and Currency Table  
Change Password  
181  
238  
85  
Service Reporting Control  
Cellular Result Code  
Network Registration  
Restore SMS Settings  
Radio Link Protocol  
87  
AT+CRC  
87  
AT+CREG  
AT+CRES  
AT+CRLP  
AT+CSAS  
AT+CSCA  
AT+CSCB  
AT+CSCS  
AT+CSDH  
164  
141  
107  
88  
Save Settings  
Service Centre Address  
Select Cell Broadcast Message Type  
Select Character Set  
Show Text Mode Parameters  
183  
215  
211  
209  
264  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17. ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF AT COMMANDS  
AT Command  
Description  
Page No.  
AT+CSMP  
AT+CSMS  
AT+CSQ  
AT+CSSN  
AT+CTZU  
AT+CUSD  
AT+CVHU  
"AT+F____"  
AT+GCAP  
AT+ICF  
AT+IFC  
AT+ILRR  
AT+IPR  
AT+VTS  
AT+WS46  
ATA  
Set Text Mode Parameters  
Select Message Service  
210  
212  
89  
Signal Strength  
Supplementary Service Notification  
Automatic Time Zone Update  
Unstructured Supplementary Service Data  
Voice Hang-Up  
255  
90  
257  
67  
Low Level Fax Commands  
Request Modem Capabilities List  
Cable Interface Character Format  
DTE-DCE Local Flow Control  
Cable Interface Local Rate Reporting  
Cable Interface Port Command  
DTMF and Tone Generation  
Mode Selection  
130  
174  
141  
142  
143  
143  
67  
136  
61  
Answer  
ATD  
Dial  
62  
ATE  
Command Echo  
137  
64  
ATH  
Hang up  
ATI  
Identification Information  
Return to Online Data Mode  
Select Pulse Dialling  
133  
64  
ATO  
ATP  
64  
ATQ  
Result Code Suppression  
Automatic Answer Control  
Automatic Disconnect Delay Control  
Escape Sequence Character  
Command Line Termination Character  
Response Formatting Character  
Command Line Editing Character (BACKSPACE)  
Blind Dial Delay Control  
69  
ATS0  
69  
ATS10  
ATS2  
74  
70  
ATS3  
70  
ATS4  
71  
ATS5  
72  
ATS6  
72  
ATS7  
Connection Completion Timeout  
Comma Dial Modifier Delay Control  
72  
ATS8  
72  
265  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GM29 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
AT Command  
Description  
Page No.  
ATT  
ATV  
ATX  
ATZ  
Select Tone Dialling  
64  
137  
65  
DCE Response Format  
Call Progress Monitoring Control  
Reset to Default Configuration  
138  
Unsolicited  
Description  
Page No.  
Result Code  
*E2STKE  
*E2STKP  
*E2STKR  
*E2STKU  
STK Send Short Message  
STK Send SS  
230  
231  
233  
232  
STK Refresh  
STK Send USSD  
266  
LZT 123 7361 R1A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Sharp Calculator EL330TB User Manual
Sharp Printer LaserJet 1012 User Manual
Shindaiwa Welder DGW400DM 380A User Manual
Sony CRT Television KV XF25M80 User Manual
Sony Ericsson Digital Camera DSC S600 User Manual
Sony Webcam EVI HD3V User Manual
SOYO Computer Hardware SY 7IZB+ User Manual
Stow Music Mixer MS 40H User Manual
Subaru Robin Power Products Portable Generator PKV401T User Manual
Tanaka Blower TBL 300 User Manual